JP2020171426A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game.SOLUTION: In a Pachinko machine 1, as a mode of variable display of a normal symbol based on one normal symbol winning/losing determination, a mode corresponding to execution of time saving control is set, and as a mode of a normal symbol winning based on the one normal symbol winning/losing determination, a mode corresponding while time saving control is stopped is set. As a result, the mode of the variable display of the normal symbol and the mode of the normal symbol winning game state based on the one normal symbol winning/losing determination can be set as the mode corresponding to different game states, thereby enhancing game amusement.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 60

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine including an electric ball inlet and a non-electric ball inlet.

Conventionally, a game machine including an electric ball entrance port and a non-electric ball entry port is known (see Patent Document 1).
In this game machine, when the normal hit lottery is won, the game per normal figure is executed, and during the execution of the normal hit game, the electric winning device (electric ball entrance) is opened and the game to the electric winning device It is possible to enter the ball. Then, in conjunction with the entry of the game ball into the electric winning device, the non-electric winning device (non-electric entry port) is opened, and the game ball can be entered into the non-electric winning device.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-121399

However, with a conventional game machine, there is a risk that the interest of the game will be reduced.
That is, in the conventional game machine, in the variable short state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol variation game is shortened and the opening time of the electric opening / closing blade is long as compared with the non-variable short state. Therefore, the mode of the normal map variation game based on one ordinary hit lottery and the mode of the game per game cannot be set to correspond to different game states, so that the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is lowered. There is a fear.
An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the first invention is won by a game control means that executes a specific game after executing a variable game when it is determined by the winning / failing determination, and by the winning / failing determination. The game control means includes a specific state control means capable of causing a specific state in which the frequency of determination is improved, and the game control means sets a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the specific state as a mode of the variable game. As a mode of the specific game, it is possible to set a mode corresponding to the non-occurrence of the specific state.
In the gaming machine according to the first invention, a mode corresponding to the occurrence of a specific state is set as a mode of a variable game based on one hit / fail judgment, and a specific state is set as a mode of the specific game based on the one hit / fail judgment. The corresponding aspect is set during the non-occurrence of.
As a result, the mode of the variable game and the mode of the specific game based on one hit / fail determination can be set to correspond to different game states, and the interest of the game can be improved.
Here, as the hit / fail judgment, the general figure hit judgment described later corresponds. As the variable game, the variable display of the normal symbol described later corresponds. As the specific game, the game state per normal figure described later corresponds. The main control board 200 (step S4-14) described later corresponds to the game control means. The specific state corresponds to the high-probability state (during time reduction control), which will be described later. The main control board 200 (step S4-13) described later corresponds to the specific state control means. As a mode corresponding to the occurrence of a specific state, the second fluctuation time described later corresponds. The first opening / closing pattern, which will be described later, corresponds to the mode corresponding to the non-occurrence of the specific state.

In the game machine according to the first invention, the game machine according to the second invention includes an electric ball entry port that is displaced so that a game ball can be inserted during execution of a specific game, and the electric ball entry port. A specific state is provided with an operating area through which the entered game ball can pass, and a non-electric entry port that is displaced to a state in which the game ball can enter when the game ball passes through the operating area. In the specific game started during the non-occurrence, as compared with the specific game started during the occurrence of the specific state, it becomes easier for the game ball entering the electric entry port to pass through the operating region, and the specific game is launched. The ratio of the number of prize balls to be paid out to the number of game balls is 100% or more.
In the game machine according to the second invention, in the specific game started during the non-occurrence of the specific state, the game ball entered into the electric ball entrance as compared with the specific game started during the occurrence of the specific state. It becomes easy to pass through the working area. In particular, during the specific game started during the non-occurrence of the specific state, the ratio of the number of prize balls to be paid out to the number of game balls to be launched is 100% or more.
As a result, it is possible to increase the number of balls held by the player based on the entry of the game ball into the non-electric ball entrance during non-occurrence in a specific state, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game. Become.
Here, the electric ball entry device 71, which will be described later, corresponds to the electric ball entry port. Each operating gate g1 and g2 described later corresponds to the operating region. As the non-electric ball entry port, each non-electric ball entry device 72, 73 described later corresponds. The base ratio described later corresponds to the ratio of the number of prize balls to be paid out to the number of game balls to be fired.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view which shows the whole structure of a pachinko machine. It is the figure which showed the front of the game board, and schematically showed the part necessary for explanation. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the control system of a pachinko machine. This is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210. It is a figure which shows the content of the game state. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the type of a big hit symbol and the number of time reductions (the game state which shifts after the end of a big hit game state). It is a figure which shows the relationship between the type of a small hit symbol and the continuation status of time saving control. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation time of the special symbol which is selected and set during occurrence of each game state. It is a figure which shows the transition of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows the CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows the initialization process at the time of power restoration. It is a flowchart which shows the main loop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the evacuation processing at the time of power-off. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the dynamic port output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the performance display device output processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting-related processing. It is a flowchart which shows the switch management process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure start ball detection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a starting ball detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a starting ball detection process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the special game management process. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special game management process. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a special game management process. It is a flowchart which shows the special game management process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure change waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during special figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during stop of a special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening the big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric service opening / closing switching processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening closure effective processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening opening end wait processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening the big prize opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening control processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric service opening / closing switching processing. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening closing effective processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening end wait processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows a normal game management process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal game management process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal game management process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure fluctuation waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during stop of a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the processing before opening of a normal electric accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory opening control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric service opening / closing switching processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory closing effective processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric accessory opening end weight processing. It is a flowchart which shows the performance display device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the subtimer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the hold command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows the variable command reception processing. It is a flowchart which shows the stop command reception process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening command reception process. It is a figure which shows the structure of the accessory unit. It is a figure which shows the content of a normal game. It is a figure which shows the opening and closing pattern of a normal electric accessory, and the distribution pattern of a distribution movable body. It is a figure which shows the transition of the game state after the end of the jackpot game state.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the present embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to the pachinko machine 1.

(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of the pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, an integrated door unit 4, and a game board unit 10.
The outer frame unit 2, the inner frame unit 3, and the integrated door unit 4 are fixed to each other via a hinge mechanism. As a result, the inner frame unit 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2. Further, the integrated door unit 4 can be opened and closed with respect to each of the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2.

The outer frame unit 2 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (outer frame). Then, the outer frame included in the outer frame unit 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement park.
The inner frame unit 3 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is arranged inside the outer frame unit 2.
The integrated door unit 4 is formed in a rectangular door shape. The door unit 4 includes a transparent plate 4a arranged at a substantially central portion, a decorative portion 4b arranged around the transparent plate 4a, a saucer unit 5 arranged under the transparent plate 4a, and a saucer. It has a firing handle 6 arranged on the side of the unit 5.
The transparent plate 4a is formed in a flat plate shape by a transparent material such as resin or glass. The decorative portion 4b is formed of a transparent or translucent resin material and has a shape that bulges forward. Each corner on the upper side of the decorative portion 4b is provided with a sound extraction portion 4c in which a speaker 22 (see FIG. 3) is arranged. Each sound extraction unit 4c is provided with a plurality of sound extraction holes through which the sound output by the speaker 22 passes. Further, a frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the decorative portion 4b. The frame lamp 20 is configured to include a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The saucer unit 5 has a saucer 5a for receiving game balls (rental balls and prize balls), an effect button 5b arranged on the front side of the saucer 5a, and a rotary selector 5c.
The effect button 5b is formed in a substantially columnar shape, and is arranged so as to project upward from the saucer unit 5. The effect button 5b can be pressed by the player (operated downward). Inside the saucer unit 5, a first operation detection switch 24 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the pressing operation of the effect button 5b is arranged. The first operation detection switch 24 outputs a first operation signal to the effect control board 300 (see FIG. 3) each time the effect button 5b is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called “jog dial”) is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and is arranged so as to surround the effect button 5b. The rotary selector 5c can be rotated (operated around a cylindrical axis) by a player. Inside the saucer unit 5, a second operation detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3) for detecting the rotation operation of the rotary selector 5c is arranged. The second operation detection switch 25 outputs a second operation signal to the effect control board 300 each time the rotary selector 5c is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60 [°]).

Further, a lending operation unit 7 is arranged on the upper surface of the saucer unit 5. The lending operation unit 7 has a ball lending button 7a, a return button 7b, and a frequency display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicably connected to a CR unit (not shown) capable of reading and updating the information recorded on the prepaid card. Then, when the prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, when the ball lending button 7a is operated with the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the saucer 5a. At this time, the remaining frequency of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls paid out, and the remaining frequency of the updated valuable medium is displayed on the frequency display device 7c.
Further, if the return button 7b is operated with the prepaid card having the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the CR unit, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit.
Here, as the prepaid cart, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, or the like is applicable.
The firing handle 6 can be rotated by the player. Inside the launch handle 6, a launch volume 410 (see FIG. 3) that detects the angle at which the launch handle 6 is rotated is arranged. The firing volume 410 outputs a detection signal according to the detected angle to the payout control board 400 (see FIG. 3).

(Structure of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the front surface of the game board and schematically showing a part particularly necessary for explanation. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the configuration of the accessory unit.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inside of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3. As a result, the game board unit 10 is arranged on the back side of the integrated door unit 4. Then, the player can visually recognize the game board 11 (game area 30) described later through the transparent plate 4a. In the present embodiment, a game area 30 described later is configured between the back surface of the transparent plate 4a and the front surface of the game board 11.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board unit 10 includes a set plate (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set plate, and various effect devices (main image display device 31, sub) attached to the set plate. An image display device 32, a movable body unit, etc.) are provided.
The set plate is formed in a box shape with the front side open. An opening formed of a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the back plate of the set plate.
The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set plate. The game board 11 is formed of a resin in a flat plate shape. An opening (not shown) formed of a through hole is provided in a substantially central portion of the game board 11. Then, the player can visually recognize the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set plate.
Around the opening in the front surface of the game board 11, a game area 30 is formed in which the game ball launched in response to the rotation operation of the launch handle 6 flows down. Then, in the game area 30, as a path through which the game ball flows down, a left path formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right path formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 are configured. There is.
Further, a board lamp 21 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the game area 30 of the game board 11. The board lamp 21 is configured to include a plurality of light emitting elements (LEDs) driven by dynamic lighting control.

The main image display device 31 is attached to the back side of the set plate. The main image display device 31 is composed of a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display. The main image display device 31 has a display screen 31a capable of displaying an effect image.
The display screen 31a corresponds to the effect symbol display area A (not shown) corresponding to the special figure 1 display device (first special symbol) described later, and the special figure 2 display device (second special symbol) described later. It is possible to configure the effect symbol display area B (not shown).
In each of the effect symbol display areas A and B, three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 on which the first effect symbol z1 (not shown) and the second effect symbol z2 (not shown) are displayed. It is configured to include one second effect symbol display area a4.
The first effect symbol z1 is configured to include identification information (design) such as numbers, characters, symbols, and characters. In each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the first effect symbol z1. The second effect symbol z2 is composed of a color bar. In the second effect symbol display area a4, it is possible to perform variable display and stop display of the second effect symbol z2.
The variable display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 means that the first effect symbol z1 is moved (scrolled) in each of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and is displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. 2 A display in which the type of the effect symbol z2 is changed (the color represented by the color bar is sequentially changed).
The stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 means that one type of the first effect symbol z1 is stopped at the lottery result display positions of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second effect symbol display area a4. In, a display in which one type of second effect symbol z2 is displayed (a color bar represents a predetermined color).
Then, in the effect symbol display area A, the first effect symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 and the second effect symbol z2 that is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. The result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed by the combination of and.
Further, in the effect symbol display area B, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. The result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed by the combination of and.
Further, on the display screen 31a, it is possible to configure the reserved symbol display areas b1 and b2 (not shown) on which the reserved symbol h (not shown) is displayed.
In the reserved symbol display area b1, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special figure 1 game information described later is displayed. In the reserved symbol display area b2, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information described later is displayed.

The sub image display device 32 is arranged at a position on the front side of the main image display device 31.
The sub-image display device 32 is composed of variable display devices such as a liquid crystal display and a CRT display. The sub-image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying an effect image.
The sub-image display device 32 can be displaced (moved) along the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub-image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including the origin position (see FIG. 2) and the effect position below the origin position (not shown). ..
The sub-image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the origin position is arranged above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub-image display device 32 arranged (displaced) at the effect position is arranged on the front side of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and covers a part of the display screen 31a.

A first starting port 51 is provided on the left path. The first starting port 51 is an entry port (so-called “navel”) that opens upward, and a game ball can enter the ball at all times. The first starting port 51 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left path (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the right path).
A special drawing 1 starting port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the first starting port 51. The special figure 1 start port switch 101 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the first start port 51 (the ball has entered the first start port 51). Output. The main control board 200 executes the first special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 1 start port switch 101.

On the left side of the first starting port 51 on the left route, an upper left other winning opening 57a, a left middle other winning opening 57b, and a lower left other winning opening 57c are provided. Each of the other winning openings 57a to 57c is an entrance opening that opens upward, and a game ball can be entered at all times. Each of the other winning openings 57a to 57c is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the left route (it is not possible to enter a game ball flowing down the right route).
The game board 11 is provided with a left winning opening switch 106 (see FIG. 3). The left winning opening switch 106 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the other winning openings 57a to 57c (entry of the game ball into the other winning openings 57a to 57c). Output. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the left prize opening switch 106.

A starting gate 41 is provided at the uppermost stream of the right route. The starting gate 41 is formed so that it can be passed by a game ball at all times. The starting gate 41 can be passed by a game ball flowing down the right path (cannot be passed by a game ball flowing down the left path).
A gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3) is provided at the starting gate 41. The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball passing through the start gate 41 (passage of the start gate 41 by the game ball). The main control board 200 executes a normal symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104.

An accessory unit 70 is provided on the downstream side of the starting gate 41 on the right side route.
As shown in FIG. 59, the accessory unit 70 includes a flow path R, an electric ball entry device (electric accessory device) 71, a first non-electric ball entry device (non-electric accessory device) 72, and a second. It is configured to include a non-electric ball entry device (non-electric accessory device) 73.
All the game balls that have flowed into the right route flow into the flow path R. The flow path R extends along the vertical direction and is configured to allow the game ball to flow (pass). Then, the game ball that has passed through the flow path R flows out (is discharged) to the upstream side of the large winning opening 55, which will be described later.

The electric ball entry device 71 is an entry port that opens and closes (operates) electrically. That is, the electric ball entry device 71 is an entry port that uses electricity as power for opening / closing (operating). In other words, the electric ball entry device 71 is a ball entry port that is opened / closed (operated) by an electric actuator (solenoid, motor, etc.).
The electric ball entry device 71 includes a ball entry port 71a capable of entering a game ball, and a normal electric accessory (ordinary electric role) 71b that opens and closes the ball entry port 71a.
The ball entry port 71a allows a game ball flowing down the flow path R to enter the ball.
The ordinary electric accessory 71b is in a closed state (state shown by a solid line in FIG. 59) that makes it difficult (impossible) to enter the game ball into the ball entry port 71a, and a ball entry state of the game ball into the ball entry port 71a. It is possible to displace to the open state (the state shown by the broken line in FIG. 59), which makes it easy (possible).
The ordinary electric accessory 71b is opened and closed by the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). At the entry port 71a, the normal electric accessory 71b is normally closed and it is impossible to enter a game ball. However, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the ordinary electric accessory 71b Is opened, and a game ball can be entered.

An electric ball entry switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the electric ball entry device 71.
The electric ball entry port switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball entered from the entry port 71a (the entry of the game ball into the entry port 71a). The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the electric ball entry switch 105.
Further, in the electric ball entry device 71, the first path r1, the second path r2, and the game ball entered from the entry port 71a are placed in one of the first path r1 and the second path r2. A distribution movable body 71c and a discharge port 71d are provided.
Each path r1 and r2 is configured to allow the game ball to flow down (pass). Each path r1 and r2 extends along the vertical direction.
The second path r2 is provided with a first actuating gate g1 and a second actuating gate g2. The operating gates g1 and g2 are formed so as to be able to pass by a game ball flowing down the second path r2 at all times.

The first actuating gate g1 is provided with a first movable lever (not shown). The first movable lever is in a closed state where contact (collision) is possible with a game ball passing through the first actuating gate g1 and is open so that contact (collision) is impossible with a game ball passing through the first actuating gate g1. It is possible to displace with the state.
The first movable lever is connected to a first non-electric accessory 72b, which will be described later, via a first link mechanism (not shown). As a result, when the first movable lever is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the first link mechanism is activated in conjunction with this, and the first non-electric accessory 72b is displaced from the closed state to the open state. Further, when the first non-electric accessory 72b is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the first lock mechanism described later is activated to lock (lock) the first non-electric accessory 72b to the open state. On the other hand, as will be described later, when a predetermined number of game balls (2 [balls] in the present embodiment) enter the ball entry port 72a and the lock by the first lock mechanism is released, the first non-electricity is released. The accessory 72b is displaced from the open state to the closed state, and in conjunction with this, the first link mechanism is activated to displace the first movable lever from the open state to the closed state.

The second operating gate g2 is provided with a second movable lever (not shown). The second movable lever is in a closed state where contact (collision) is possible with a game ball passing through the second actuating gate g2, and is open so that contact (collision) is impossible with a game ball passing through the second actuating gate g2. It is possible to displace with the state.
The second movable lever is connected to a second non-electric accessory 73b, which will be described later, via a second link mechanism (not shown). As a result, when the second movable lever is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the second link mechanism is activated in conjunction with this, and the second non-electric accessory 73b is displaced from the closed state to the open state. Further, when the second non-electric accessory 73b is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the second lock mechanism described later is activated to lock (lock) the second non-electric accessory 73b to the open state. On the other hand, as will be described later, when a predetermined number of game balls (2 [balls] in the present embodiment) enter the ball entry port 73a and the lock by the second lock mechanism is released, the second non-electric The accessory 73b is displaced from the open state to the closed state, and in conjunction with this, the second link mechanism is activated to displace the second movable lever from the open state to the closed state.

The distribution movable body 71c has a first state in which the game ball entered from the entry port 71a is distributed to the first path r1 and a second state in which the game ball entered from the entry port 71a is distributed to the second path r2. It is possible to displace to.
That is, when the distribution movable body 71c is displaced to the first state, all the game balls entered from the entry port 71a are distributed to the first path r1. As a result, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball entered from the entry port 71a to pass through each of the operating gates g1 and g2.
On the other hand, when the distribution movable body 71c is displaced to the second state, all the game balls entered from the entry port 71a are distributed to the second path r2. As a result, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball entered from the entry port 71a to pass through the respective operating gates g1 and g2.
The distribution movable body 71c is displaced by the distribution movable body solenoid 67 (see FIG. 3).
The discharge port 71d is provided on the downstream side of the first path r1 and the second path r2. As a result, all the game balls entered from the entry port 71a are discharged to the discharge path described later through the discharge port 71d after passing through any of the paths r1 and r2.

All the game balls entered from the entry port 71a are detected by the electric entry port switch 105, and then distributed to one of the first path r1 and the second path r2 by the distribution movable body 71c. After passing through the route, the product is discharged to the discharge path through the discharge port 71d.
At this time, the game balls distributed to the first region are discharged to the discharge path through the discharge port 71d without passing through the gates g1 and g2.
On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the first region are discharged to the discharge path through the discharge port 71d after passing through the gates g1 and g2. At this time, when the game ball passes through the first operating gate g1 while the first movable lever is in the closed state, the game ball comes into contact (collision) with the first movable lever, and the weight of the game ball causes the game ball to come into contact with (collision) with the first movable lever. , The first movable lever is displaced from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the first non-electric accessory 72b is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the ball entry port 72a. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the first actuating gate g1 while the first movable lever is in the open state, the game ball does not come into contact (collision) with the first movable lever, and the first movable lever Does not displace. Further, when the game ball passes through the second operating gate g2 while the second movable lever is in the closed state, the game ball comes into contact (collision) with the second movable lever, and the weight of the game ball causes the game ball to come into contact with (collision). The second movable lever is displaced from the closed state to the open state. As a result, the second non-electric accessory 73b is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the ball entry port 73a. On the other hand, if the game ball passes through the second operating gate g2 while the second movable lever is in the open state, the game ball does not come into contact (collision) with the second movable lever, and the second movable lever Does not displace.

Each of the non-electric ball entry devices 72 and 73 is a non-electric ball entry port that opens and closes (operates). That is, each of the non-electric ball entry devices 72 and 73 is a ball entry port that uses the weight of the game ball as the power for opening / closing (operation) without using electricity. In other words, each non-electric ball entry device 72, 73 serves as a ball entry port that is opened / closed (operated) by a mechanical mechanism that is operated by the weight of the game ball, regardless of the electric actuator (solenoid, motor, etc.). There is.

The first non-electric ball entry device 72 is configured to include a ball entry port 72a capable of entering a game ball and a first non-electric accessory 72b that opens and closes the ball entry port 72a.
The ball entry port 72a allows a game ball flowing down the flow path R to enter the ball.
The first non-electric accessory 72b is in a closed state (state shown by a solid line in FIG. 59) that makes it difficult (impossible) to enter the game ball into the ball entry port 72a, and a game ball into the ball entry port 72a. It is possible to displace the ball into an open state (shown by a broken line in FIG. 59) that facilitates (possible) entry.
The first non-electric accessory 72b is connected to the first movable lever of the first actuating gate g1 via the first link mechanism. As a result, when the first movable lever is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the first link mechanism is activated in conjunction with this, and the first non-electric accessory 72b is displaced from the closed state to the open state.
The first non-electric ball entry device 72 is provided with a first lock mechanism. In the first non-electric ball entry device 72, when the first non-electric accessory 72b is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the first lock mechanism is activated and the first non-electric accessory 72b is locked to the open state. It will be stopped). Further, when the number of game balls entered from the entry port 72a reaches a predetermined number (2 [balls] in the present embodiment), the lock of the first non-electric accessory 72b by the first lock function is released. The first non-electric accessory 72b is displaced from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the first non-electric accessory 72b is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the first link mechanism is activated in conjunction with this, and the first movable lever is displaced from the open state to the closed state. As a result, after the first non-electric accessory 72b is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the number of game balls that have entered the first non-electric ball entry device 72 (ball entry port 72a) is a predetermined number (this implementation). In the embodiment, the game ball can easily (possibly) enter the first non-electric ball entry device 72 (ball entry port 72a) during the period until 2 [ball]) is reached.
A first non-electric ball entry switch 111 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the first non-electric ball entry device 72.
The first non-electric ball entry port switch 111 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball entered from the entry port 72a (the entry of the game ball into the entry port 72a). Output. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the first non-electric ball entry switch 111.

The second non-electric ball entry device 73 includes a ball entry port 73a capable of entering a game ball, and a second non-electric accessory 73b that opens and closes the ball entry port 73a.
The ball entry port 73a allows a game ball flowing down the flow path R to enter the ball.
The second non-electric accessory 73b is in a closed state (state shown by a solid line in FIG. 59) that makes it difficult (impossible) to enter the game ball into the ball entry port 73a, and a game ball into the ball entry port 73a. It is possible to displace the ball into an open state (shown by a broken line in FIG. 59) that facilitates (possible) entry.
The second non-electric accessory 73b is connected to the second movable lever of the second operating gate g2 via the second link mechanism. As a result, when the second movable lever is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the second link mechanism is activated in conjunction with this, and the second non-electric accessory 73b is displaced from the closed state to the open state.
The second non-electric ball entry device 73 is provided with a second lock mechanism. In the second non-electric ball entry device 73, when the second non-electric accessory 73b is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the second lock mechanism is activated and the second non-electric accessory 73b is locked to the open state. It will be stopped). Further, when the number of game balls entered from the entry port 73a reaches a predetermined number (2 [balls] in the present embodiment), the lock of the second non-electric accessory 73b by the second lock function is released. The second non-electric accessory 73b is displaced from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the second non-electric accessory 73b is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the second link mechanism is activated in conjunction with this, and the second movable lever is displaced from the open state to the closed state. As a result, after the second non-electric accessory 73b is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the number of game balls that have entered the second non-electric ball entry device 73 (ball entry port 73a) is a predetermined number (this implementation). In the embodiment, the game ball can be inserted into the second non-electric ball entry device 73 (ball entry port 73a) during the period until the ball reaches 2 [ball]).
A second non-electric ball entry switch 112 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the second non-electric ball entry device 73.
The second non-electric ball entry port switch 112 sends a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball entered from the entry port 73a (the entry of the game ball into the entry port 73a). Output. The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the second non-electric ball entry switch 112.

The game ball that has flowed into the right path flows into the flow path R after passing through the start gate 41. Then, as for the game ball that has flowed into the flow path R, one of the electric ball entry device 71, the first non-electric ball entry device 72, and the second non-electric ball entry device 73 is in the open state. If it is, the ball enters the ball entry device that is in the open state, and if all the ball entry devices are in the closed state, it passes through the flow path R and flows out to the upstream side of the grand prize opening 55. (Eject).

A large winning opening 55 is provided on the downstream side of the accessory unit 70 on the right route. The large winning opening 55 is displaced into a closed state that makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 55 and an open state that allows the game ball to enter the large winning opening 55. A special electric accessory (special electric accessory) 55a capable of the above is provided.
The special electric accessory 55a is opened and closed by the large winning opening solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). In the large winning opening 55, the special electric accessory 55a is normally closed and it is impossible to enter a game ball, but a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) When the "big hit" is won by the lottery), the special electric accessory 55a is opened and the game ball can be entered. The large winning opening 55 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right route (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left route).
A count switch 103 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the large winning opening 55. The count switch 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 55 (the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 55). The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute the prize ball payout operation in response to the input of the detection signal from the count switch 103.
Further, in the large winning opening 55, a V region (not shown), a discharging region (not shown), and a game ball entering the large winning opening 55 are placed in one of the V region and the discharging region. A distribution means (not shown) for distributing to the area of is provided.
A V region switch 110 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the V region. The V region switch 110 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball passing through the V region (passage of the V region by the game ball). The main control board 200 sets "1" in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, which will be described later, triggered by the input of the detection signal from the V area switch 110.
The distribution means is displaced into a V-passing state in which the game balls entered in the large winning opening 55 are distributed to the V region and a non-V passing state in which the game balls entered in the large winning opening 55 are distributed to the discharge region. It is possible to do.
That is, when the distribution means is displaced to the V passing state, all the game balls that have entered the large winning opening 55 are distributed to the V region. As a result, it becomes impossible for the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 55 to pass through the discharge area.
On the other hand, when the distribution means is displaced to the non-V passing state, all the game balls that have entered the large winning opening 55 are distributed to the discharge area. As a result, it is impossible for the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 55 to pass through the V region.
The sorting means is displaced by the V-region solenoid 66 (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that has entered the large winning opening 55 is first detected by the count switch 103, then distributed by the distribution means to one of the V region and the discharge region, and after passing through the region. , Is discharged to the discharge channel. At this time, the game balls distributed to the V region are detected by the V region switch 110.

A second starting port 52 is provided on the downstream side of the large winning opening 55 on the right route. The second starting port 52 is an entry port (so-called “navel”) that opens upward, and a game ball can enter the ball at all times. The second starting port 52 is capable of entering a game ball flowing down the right path (it is impossible to enter a game ball flowing down the left path).
A special figure 2 start port switch 102 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the second start port 52. The special figure 2 start port switch 102 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball entering the second start port 52 (the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52). Output. The main control board 200 executes the second special symbol lottery in response to the input of the detection signal from the special figure 2 start port switch 102.

At the most downstream of the game area 30, an out port 58 for ejecting a game ball that has not entered (winned) in any of the winning openings 51, 52, 55, 57a to 57c, 71 to 73 is provided. There is.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which the game balls discharged from the game area 30 pass. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, all the game balls launched into the game area 30 (all the game balls discharged from the game area 30) are configured to pass through the discharge path. That is, the game ball launched into the game area 30 is played by entering any of the winning openings 51, 52, 55, 57a to 57c, 71-73, or by passing through the out opening 58. It is discharged from the region 30 and flows into the discharge path.
Specifically, the game balls that have entered each of the winning openings 51, 52, 55, 57a to 57c, 71 to 73 are detected by switches 101-103, 105, 106, 111, 112 arranged in the winning openings. After being done, it is guided to the discharge channel. Further, the game ball discharged from the out port 58 is guided to the discharge path.
An out switch 109 (see FIG. 3) is arranged in the inner frame unit 3. Then, the out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the game ball (the game ball discharged from the game area 30) passing through the discharge path. As a result, all the game balls discharged from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109.
Further, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game ball to the winning openings 51, 52, 55, 57a to 57c, 71 to 73 and the starting gate 41.

A main display device 60 is arranged on the game board 11. The main display device 60 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light emitting element (LED in this embodiment).
Information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60.
The main display device 60 includes a special figure 1 display device, a special figure 2 display device, a normal figure display device, a special figure 1 hold display device, a special figure 2 hold display device, a normal figure hold display device, and a round. It is configured to include a display device, a right-handed display device, a probability change display device, and a time saving display device.
Specifically, the main display device 60 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32).
In the main display device 60, LEDs 1 to LED8 constitute a special figure 1 display device, LEDs 7 to LED16 constitute a special figure 2 display device, and LEDs 17 and 18 form a normal figure display device, and LED19 ~ LED23 constitutes a round display device, LED24 constitutes a right-handed display device, LEDs 25 and 26 constitute a special figure 1 hold display device, and LEDs 27 and 28 constitute a special figure 2 hold display device. However, the LEDs 29 and 30 constitute a normal drawing hold display device, the LED 31 constitutes a probability variation display device, and the LED 32 constitutes a time saving display device.

The special figure 1 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the first special symbol composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 1 display device, the result of the first special symbol lottery is displayed by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
The special figure 2 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the second special symbol composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the special figure 2 display device, the result of the second special symbol lottery is displayed by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
Here, the display of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device and the display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 in the effect symbol display area A are the time when the variable display is started, the time when the stop display is started, and the time when the stop display is started. , Each of the lottery results indicated by the stopped and displayed symbols is associated with each other.
Further, the display of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device and the display of the effect symbols z1 and z2 in the effect symbol display area B are the time when the variable display is started, the time when the stop display is started, and the display. Each of the lottery results indicated by the stopped and displayed symbols is associated with each other.
Then, when the first special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (big hit symbol), or the second special symbol (stop displayed) displayed on the special figure 2 display device. When the stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (big hit symbol), a jackpot gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is generated.
In addition, when the first special symbol (stop symbol) stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device becomes a specific symbol (small hit symbol), or the second special symbol stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. When the (stop symbol) becomes a specific symbol (small hit symbol), a small hit gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, occurs.
The normal symbol display device can perform variable display and stop display of a normal symbol composed of numbers, symbols, and the like. Then, in the normal symbol display device, the result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed by the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed. Then, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device becomes a specific symbol (per symbol per symbol), a game state per normal symbol, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.

The special figure 1 hold display device displays the number of times (special figure 1 hold number) that the display of the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery is held.
The special figure 2 hold display device displays the number of times (special figure 2 hold number) that the display of the lottery result of the second special symbol lottery is held.
The number of times the display of the lottery result of the ordinary symbol lottery is held (the number of times the normal figure is held) is displayed on the normal figure hold display device.
The round display device displays the number of round games (type of big hit game state or type of small hit game state) executed during the big hit game state or the small hit game state.
The right-handed display device displays the route (left side route or right side route) at which the game ball should be launched.
The probability change display device displays the gaming state (during the occurrence of the special figure high probability state or during the occurrence of the special figure low probability state) when the power is restored.
The time saving display device displays the current gaming status (time saving control is being executed or stopped).

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with one or a plurality of movable unit units (not shown). In the present embodiment, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with one or more movable body units, and the game board unit 10 is provided with one or more movable body units.
Each movable unit of the integrated door unit 4 is arranged on the front surface of the decorative portion 4b, the upper surface of the saucer unit 5, and the like, and it is possible to perform a predetermined effect operation.
Each movable unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set plate. Specifically, each movable unit is arranged in a space (hereinafter, referred to as "effect space") between the game board 11 and the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a). Then, each movable body unit can perform a predetermined effect operation in the effect space.
Each movable body unit includes an effect member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 26 (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 3) is used as a drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. A solenoid may be used as the drive source.
The effect member can be displaced along a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the effect member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and an effect position. The effect member is driven (displaced) by the motor 23.

The position detection sensor 26 is composed of a photo sensor or the like. The position detection sensor 26 detects the position of the effect member. Specifically, the position detection sensor 26 includes a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit that receives the light projected from the light projecting unit. Then, the position detection sensor 26 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 in response to the light reception (detection) of the light projected from the light emitting unit by the light receiving unit. On the other hand, when the position detection sensor 26 does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light emitting unit by the light receiving unit, the position detection sensor 26 stops the output of the detection signal to the effect control board 300.
In addition, a shielding plate is provided at a predetermined position of the effect member. Then, when the effect member is arranged at the initial position, the shielding plate is arranged between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the position detection sensor 26, and the incoming light to the light receiving portion is blocked. As a result, when the effect member is arranged at the initial position, the output of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 26 to the effect control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the effect member is not arranged at the initial position, the position detection sensor 26 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300.
As a result, the effect control board 300 can detect whether or not the effect member is arranged at the initial position depending on the input status of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 26.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with detection sensors for detecting various abnormal states.
In the present embodiment, as the detection sensor, a glass frame opening sensor 107, an inner frame opening sensor 108, a vibration detection sensor 113, a radio wave detection sensor 114, a magnetic detection sensor 115, and the like are arranged.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects the opening of the integrated door unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3. Then, the glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the opening of the integrated door unit 4 with respect to the inner frame unit 3.
The inner frame opening sensor 108 detects the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2. Then, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 with respect to the outer frame unit 2.
The vibration detection sensor 113 detects the vibration of the game board 11. In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is arranged on the game board 11. Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the vibration of the game board 11.
The radio wave detection sensor 114 detects radio waves generated around the game board 11. In the present embodiment, the game board 11 is provided with two radio wave detection sensors 114. Then, each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of the radio wave.
The magnetic detection sensor 115 detects the magnetism generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is arranged in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). Further, in the game board 11, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are arranged. Then, the magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the detection of magnetism. Further, each magnetic detection sensor 115 arranged on the game board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of magnetism.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a control system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 4 is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210.
The pachinko machine 1 includes various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 supplies power (electric power) to the main control board 200, the effect control board 300, the payout control board 400, each control board 200, 300, 400, and the like. It includes a plurality of control boards such as a power supply board 600, a driver board 310, and a sub-connection board 320.
The plurality of control boards 200, 300, 400, 600 are independent (separate) circuit boards. Further, each control board 200, 300, 400, 600 is housed in an individual board case (main board case 250 or the like described later).
The main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10. Specifically, the main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11.
The payout control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the payout control board 400 is attached to the back side of the inner frame included in the inner frame unit 3.

(Structure of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be described.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 includes a one-chip microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer), a clock generation circuit 202, a random number generation circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, and a sink. It is configured to include a driver 240, source drivers 250a, 250b, and the like.
The one-chip microcomputer is an LSI in which a CPU core, registers, semiconductor memory, and the like are integrated. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer is configured to include a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, and the like.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a memory area used by the CPU 210. As shown in FIG. 4, the memory area used by the CPU 210 includes a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230. ..
Here, in FIG. 4, the address for specifying the memory area is indicated by a hexadecimal number (“H” indicates that it is a hexadecimal number).

The ROM 220 (memory area of the ROM 220) includes a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and a non-used area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 includes a program area, an unused area, and a data area. A program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the program area. Data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the data area. The used area m1 may be configured not to include an unused area.
The unused area m2 is configured to include a program area and a data area.
In the program area, there is a program (program code) for executing the processing related to the test specified by the game machine rules, and a program (program) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (specifically, calculating the base ratio). Code) and are stored. In the data area, data (program data) for executing the process related to the test defined by the game machine rules and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 are stored.
Further, in addition to the used area m1 and the unused area m2, the ROM 220 is provided with an unused area, a ROM comment area, a program management area, and the like.
Arbitrary data such as a program title and version is stored in the ROM comment area. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
Further, the ROM 220 is provided with an unused area m3 of a predetermined byte (for example, 16 bytes or more) between the used area m1 and the unused area m2. As a result, the boundary between the used area m1 and the non-used area m2 is clarified.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) includes a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and an unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The used area M1 is configured to include a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. The used area M1 may be configured not to include the unused area.
Specifically, the work area includes a set value area, a game machine state flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error-related area, a normal game-related area 1, and a normal game-related area 2. It is configured to include.
The set value is stored in the set value area. The game machine status flag is stored in the game machine status flag area. The checksum is stored in the checksum area. The backup flag is stored in the backup flag area. Information about the error is stored in the error-related area. A subcommand pointer or the like is stored in the normal game-related area 1. In the normal game-related area 2, input / output data on the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), lottery results, flags for managing the game state, and the like are stored. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 is an area for storing game information acquired by inputting detection signals from each of the special figure 1 start port switch 101, the special figure 2 start port switch 102, and the gate switch 104. (Game information storage area to be described later), a special figure 1 display symbol counter, a special figure 2 display symbol counter, a normal figure display symbol counter, and the like are included.
The unused area M2 is configured to include a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used during execution of a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test specified by a game machine rule or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). It is used as an area to temporarily store various data. On the other hand, in the stack area, a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test specified by a game machine rule or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206) is being executed. It is also used as an area to temporarily save various data.
Specifically, the work area is configured to include a performance display-related area. The performance display-related area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
Further, the RAM 230 is provided with an unused area M3 having a predetermined byte (16 bytes or more) between the used area M1 and the unused area M2. Thereby, the boundary between the used area M1 and the non-used area M2 is clarified.

In the present embodiment, it is permitted to refer to the data stored in the non-used area M2 in the process based on the program (the program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1.
On the other hand, it is prohibited that the data stored in the unused area M2 is rewritten (changed) by the processing based on the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1. There is.
Further, in the processing based on the program stored in the non-use area m2 (the program for executing the processing related to the test defined by the game machine rules, or the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), the use area It is permitted to refer to the data stored in M1.
On the other hand, the used area is subjected to the processing based on the program stored in the non-used area m2 (the program for executing the processing related to the test specified by the game machine rules or the program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). It is prohibited that the data stored in M1 is rewritten (changed).
The game in the pachinko machine 1 can be progressed (completed) by a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the used area m1.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronous signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 [MHz] in this embodiment), and outputs this clock to each of the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203.
The random number generation circuit 203 has a first loop counter that generates a winning random number in the normal symbol lottery, a second loop counter that generates a jackpot random number in the first special symbol lottery, and a second loop counter that generates a jackpot random number in the second special symbol lottery. It is configured to include a three-loop counter and a fourth loop counter that generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. A random number is generated for the normal symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. Generate a jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).

The third loop counter updates the value of the loop counter by 1 within a predetermined range (in the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202. Generate a jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery. In the present embodiment, the value of the third loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 0.083 [μs]).
The fourth loop counter sets the value of the loop counter within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, 0 to 10066) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (once every 32 divisions of the clock frequency). Reach group random numbers are generated by updating one by one in (within range). In the present embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s] / 12 [MHz] = 2.666 [μs]).

The input port 204 is configured to include a plurality of input ports (in this embodiment, input ports 0 to 3).
At the input port 0, a detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107, a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108, a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113, a detection signal from one radio wave detection sensor 114, and a magnetic detection sensor 115 The detection signal from is input.
A RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and the like are input to the input port 1.
The input port 2 has a detection signal from the count switch 103, a detection signal from the electric entry port switch 105, a detection signal from the left winning port switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, and a first non-electric entry port. A detection signal from the switch 111, a detection signal from the second non-electric entry port switch 112, a detection signal from the other radio wave detection sensor 114, and the like are input.
A detection signal from the special figure 1 start port switch 101, a detection signal from the special figure 2 start port switch 102, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, a detection signal from the V region switch 110, and the like are input to the input port 3. To.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception storage area corresponding to each switch sensor (detection signal). In the reception storage area corresponding to each switch sensor, 1-bit data indicating the reception state of the detection signal from the switch sensor is set.
Specifically, when the detection signal from the switch sensor is input (high level), "1" is set in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch sensor, and the switch sensor is set. When the detection signal from is not input (low level), "0" is set.

The output port 205 includes a plurality of output ports (in this embodiment, output ports 0 to output ports 4).
The output port 0 outputs data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60. Then, the data signal output from the output port 0 is input to the source driver 250a.
The output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206. The common signal output from the output port 1 is input to the sink driver 240.
The output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450.
The output port 3 is a control signal for controlling the drive of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the drive of the grand prize opening solenoid 65, a control signal for controlling the V region solenoid 66, and a distribution. A control signal or the like for controlling the drive of the movable body solenoid 67 is output.
The output port 4 outputs data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206. Then, the data signal output from the output port 4 is input to the source driver 250b.

Further, the main control board 200 is configured to include a command output port 1 and a command output port 2. Then, the CPU 210 transmits a control command (subcommand) from the command output port 1 to the effect control board 300, and also transmits a control command (payout command) from the command output port 2 to the payout control board 400. To do.
The command output port 1 and the command output port 2 are a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown), respectively. have.
The transmission data register outputs a control command input based on the subcommand transmission process (step S2-4) described later to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is composed of a plurality of registers and can store a plurality of control commands. Then, the FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the input order.
The transmission shift register performs parallel-serial conversion on the control command input from the FIFO buffer and transmits it as serial data to the effect control board 300 or the payout control board 400.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is composed of a light emitting element (LED in this embodiment). Since the performance display device 206 is arranged on the back side of the game board 11, it cannot be visually recognized by the player.
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the game machine state (hereinafter referred to as “game machine state”) includes a game available state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormality state, and a RAM abnormality state. And the backup abnormal state are specified. Then, the information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes according to the state of the gaming machine being generated.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include four (four-digit) display units (not shown). Each display unit is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display unit is composed of a 7-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot segment LED capable of displaying dots such as a decimal point.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED33 to LED64). In the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to LED 40 serve as the first digit display unit, LEDs 41 to LED 48 serve as the second digit display unit, and LEDs 49 to LED 56 serve as the third digit display unit, and LEDs 57 to LED 64. Is the display unit of the 4th digit.

During the game-enabled state, the game can proceed. Then, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 during the occurrence of the playable state.
In the present embodiment, the first base ratio and the second base ratio are set every predetermined time (5.0 [s] in the present embodiment) in the performance display device 206 during the occurrence of the playable state. , Are displayed alternately.
The "first base ratio" is the base ratio of the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the present time).
The "second base ratio" is the base ratio of the previous section (the final base ratio calculated for the previous section).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio) is provided by the upper two-digit display unit among the four-digit display units. It is displayed, and a number indicating the base ratio (percentage) is displayed by the display unit of the lower two digits.

The set value can be changed while the setting change state is occurring. Then, during the occurrence of the setting change state, the setting value stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the information indicating that the setting change state is occurring by the upper 3 digit display unit among the 4 digit display units (specifically, the upper 1st digit is ""R","n." In the upper 2nd digit, "-" in the upper 3rd digit) is displayed, and a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed by the display unit of the lowest 1 digit. Will be done.
The set value can be confirmed while the setting confirmation state is occurring. Then, during the occurrence of the setting confirmation state, the set value stored (set) in the set value area of the RAM 230 is displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring by the upper three-digit display unit of the four-digit display unit (specifically, the upper first digit “ "r", "n." In the upper 2nd digit, no display in the upper 3rd digit) is displayed, and a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed by the display unit of the lowest 1 digit. To.

During the game stop state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, and backup abnormal state), the game cannot proceed. Then, during the occurrence of the game stop state, the performance display device 206 displays an error code corresponding to the occurrence of the abnormality.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, the information indicating that the game stopped state is occurring by the upper three-digit display unit among the four-digit display units (specifically, the upper first digit “ "E", "r." In the upper 2nd digit, no display in the upper 3rd digit) is displayed, and the error that occurred (setting error state, RAM error state, or backup error) is displayed by the display unit of the last 1 digit. A number indicating the error code corresponding to the status) is displayed.

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. That is, the RAM clear switch 207 is configured to include an operation unit that can be pressed. Then, the RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is pressed.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. That is, the setting key switch 208 is configured to include an operation unit provided with a keyhole. By inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole, the operation unit is unlocked and can be rotated (switched) from the OFF state to the ON state. Then, the setting key switch 208 outputs a detection signal to the input port 1 when the operation unit is in the ON state.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of the common signal to the display devices 60 and 206 according to the common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) output from the output port 1.
The source driver 250a controls the output of the data signal to the main display device 60 according to the data signals (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 0.
The source driver 250b controls the output of the data signal to the performance display device 206 according to the data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4.
As a result, the source driver 250a and the sink driver 240 control the lighting of the lighting elements (LED1 to LED32) included in the main display device 60.
Further, the source driver 250b and the sink driver 240 control the lighting of the lighting elements (LED33 to LED64) included in the performance display device 206.

Further, the main control board 200 is configured to include a test signal output circuit (not shown).
In the test signal output process (step S4-24) described later, the CPU 210 generates test information (test signal) indicating an internal state (big hit game state, time saving control execution state, special symbol lottery probability state, etc.). Then, the generated test signal is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from a predetermined output port. Then, the test signal output from the predetermined output port is input to the interface board of the test computer (not shown) via the test signal output circuit.
Further, in the main control board 200, the detection signal from the special figure 1 start port switch 101, the detection signal from the special figure 2 start port switch 102, the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the detection signal from the count switch 103, and the electric on Detection signal from ball mouth switch 105, detection signal from left winning port switch 106, detection signal from out switch 109, detection signal from first non-electric ball entrance switch 111, second non-electric ball entrance switch 112 The detection signal and the like are input to the input port 204 and are also input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.
Further, in the main control board 200, in order to control the drive of each solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64, grand prize opening solenoid 65, V region solenoid 66, distribution movable body solenoid 67, etc.) output from the output port 3. The control signal of is input to each solenoid 64 to 67, and is input to the interface board of the computer for test via the test signal output circuit.

(Structure of payout control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the payout control board 400 will be described.
The payout control board 400 controls the launch of the game ball to the game area 30 and the payout of the game ball.
The payout control board 400 includes a one-chip microcomputer.
The one-chip microcomputer is an LSI in which a CPU core, registers, semiconductor memory, and the like are integrated. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer is configured to include a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 based on each of the control command received from the main control board 200 and the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit.
Further, the payout control board 400 controls the launching operation of the gaming ball by the gaming ball launching device 430 based on the detection signal input from the launching volume 410. Specifically, the launching operation of the gaming ball by the gaming ball launching device 430 is controlled so that the gaming ball is launched into the gaming area 30 with a strength corresponding to the detection signal input from the firing volume 410.

(Structure of effect control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the effect control board 300 will be described.
The effect control board 300 controls the effect.
The effect control board 300 is configured to include a one-chip microcomputer.
The one-chip microcomputer is an LSI in which a CPU core, registers, semiconductor memory, and the like are integrated. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a VDP, a sound processor, an illumination controller, a motor controller, and the like.
Based on the control commands received from the main control board 200, the effect control board 300 displays the effect images on the various image display devices 31 and 32, lights the various lamps 20 and 21, outputs the sound by the various speakers 22, and various movables. It controls the drive of the motor 23 that drives the body unit.

The ROM of the effect control board 300 stores a program related to the progress of the effect, data necessary for the progress of the effect, and the like.
The RAM of the effect control board 300 temporarily stores control commands received from the main control board 200, data for performing arithmetic processing, and the like.
The CPU of the effect control board 300 determines the effect content to be executed based on the control command received from the main control board 200, and sets the effect program (effect control table) corresponding to the determined effect content.
The VDP generates display control data (display control signals) according to an effect program (effect control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated display control data to various image display devices 31 and 32.
The sound processor generates sound control data (sound control signal) according to the effect program (effect control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated sound control data to the digital audio power amplifier (not shown). Output. Then, the digital audio power amplifier generates control signals corresponding to the various speakers 22 based on the sound control data input from the sound processor, and the generated control signals are transmitted to the various speakers 22 via the sub-connection board 320. Output to.
The lighting controller generates lamp control data (lamp control signal) according to an effect program (effect control table) set by the CPU, and transfers the generated lamp control data to each of the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320. Output to.
The motor controller generates motor control data (motor control signal) according to an effect program (effect control table) set by the CPU, and transfers the generated motor control data to each of the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320. And output.

The driver board 310 includes a motor driver (not shown) and a lamp driver (not shown).
The motor control data output from the effect control board 300 is input to the motor driver. Then, the motor driver receives an excitation signal (drive) for various motors 23 (motors 23 and the like constituting the movable body unit) arranged in the game board unit 10 according to the motor control data input from the effect control board 300. Controls the output of current).
The lamp control data output from the effect control board 300 is input to the lamp driver. Then, the lamp driver controls the drive (light emission) of the light emitting element group of each system constituting the board surface lamp 21 according to the lamp control data input from the effect control board 300.
The sub-connection board 320 includes a motor driver (not shown) and a lamp driver (not shown).
The motor control data output from the effect control board 300 is input to the motor driver. Then, the motor driver receives an excitation signal (drive) for various motors 23 (motors 23 and the like constituting the movable body unit) arranged in the integrated door unit 4 according to the motor control data input from the effect control board 300. Controls the output of current).
The lamp control data output from the effect control board 300 is input to the lamp driver. Then, the lamp driver controls the drive (light emission) of the light emitting element group of each system constituting the frame lamp 20 according to the lamp control data input from the effect control board 300.

(About the state of the game machine)
In the pachinko machine 1, six states (specifically, a game-enabled state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormality state, a RAM abnormality state, and a backup abnormality state) are defined as game machine states. ..
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a game machine state flag area. In the game machine state flag area, six game machine states (specifically, game available state, setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting abnormality state, RAM abnormality state, and backup abnormality state) are set as game machine state flags. ), The value corresponding to any one of the gaming machine states is stored (set). Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a game machine state corresponding to the value stored in the game machine state flag area is generated.
The "gamable state" is a game machine state in which the game can proceed.
During the occurrence of the game-enabled state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is permitted. As a result, the game (normal game and special game) can be advanced.
In addition, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 during the game-enabled state. In addition, information about the game is displayed on the main display device 60.

The "setting change state" is a gaming machine state in which the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 can be changed.
The setting change state is generated when the setting change condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection signal is detected from the RAM clear switch 207. When the signal is input, the setting change condition is satisfied. That is, when the power is turned on, when the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, a setting change state occurs. Will be done.
While the setting change state is occurring, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the setting change state, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. In addition, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
Further, while the setting change state is occurring, the set value stored in the set value area can be changed by pressing the RAM clear switch 207. Then, if the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the game-enabled state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is fixed.

The "setting confirmation state" is a gaming machine state in which the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 can be confirmed.
The setting confirmation state is generated when the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, the detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 is input, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208 is input, and the detection signal is detected from the RAM clear switch 207. When no signal is input, the setting confirmation condition is satisfied. That is, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed, a setting confirmation state occurs. Will be done.
While the setting confirmation state is occurring, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the setting confirmation state, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. This makes it possible to check the set value stored in the set value area. In addition, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
It should be noted that the set value stored in the set value area cannot be changed while the setting confirmation state is occurring.
Then, if the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the game-enabled state is generated instead of the setting confirmation state.

The "setting abnormality state" is the game machine state in which the setting abnormality has occurred.
The setting abnormal state occurs when it is determined that the set value set in the set value area is not within the specified range during the occurrence of the game-enabled state.
During the occurrence of the setting abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the setting abnormality state, the performance display device 206 displays an error code specifying the occurrence of the setting abnormality. In addition, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the abnormal setting state, it is necessary to shut off the power and turn on the power to cause the setting change state.

The "RAM abnormal state" is a gaming machine state in which a RAM abnormality has occurred.
The RAM abnormality state occurs when the occurrence of a read / write abnormality of the RAM 230 is determined at the time of turning on the power.
During the occurrence of the RAM abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the RAM abnormality state, the performance display device 206 displays an error code specifying the occurrence of the RAM abnormality. In addition, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the RAM abnormal state, it is necessary to execute power cutoff and power on to cause a setting change state.

The "backup error state" is a game machine state in which a backup error has occurred.
The backup abnormality state occurs when it is determined that a backup abnormality of the RAM 230 (specifically, an abnormality of the backup flag or an abnormality of the checksum) occurs when the power is turned on.
During the occurrence of the backup abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited. As a result, the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Further, during the occurrence of the backup abnormality state, the performance display device 206 displays an error code specifying the occurrence of the backup abnormality. In addition, all the lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Further, security information (external information) is output to the external device.
In order to recover from the backup abnormal state, it is necessary to turn off the power and turn on the power to cause the setting change state.

(About set value)
Next, the set value (setting information) set by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "set value" is information that specifies the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery). In the present embodiment, values of "0" to "5" are defined as set values.
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a set value area. In the set value area, any one of "0" to "5" is stored (set) as a set value. Then, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is set to the probability according to the value set in the set value area.
In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the "big hit" by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery) changes according to the value set in the set value area. On the other hand, the probability of winning a "small hit" by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery) does not change according to the value set in the set value area. Note that the probability of winning a "small hit" by a special symbol lottery may be changed according to the value set in the set value area, similar to the probability of winning a "big hit" by a special symbol lottery. Absent.
The winning probability of the special symbol lottery corresponding to each set value (probability of winning the "big hit") is, in order from the one with the highest winning probability, the winning probability corresponding to the set value = "5", and the set value = "4". Corresponding winning probability, setting value = winning probability corresponding to "3", setting value = winning probability corresponding to "2", setting value = corresponding to winning probability corresponding to "1", setting value = corresponding to "0" Winning probability (winning probability "high" → winning probability "low").

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change (select) the set value stored in the set value area while the setting change state is occurring. Here, the change of the set value is executed by the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 (employee of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc.).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed. A change state occurs.
During the occurrence of the setting change state, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. Further, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the set value stored in the set value area is changed. At this time, if the set value set in the set value area is changed, the set value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
Then, if the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the game-enabled state is generated instead of the setting change state. As a result, the set value stored in the set value area is fixed.

(About base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, the base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210 during the game-playable state. In the present embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only during the occurrence of a predetermined gaming state (specifically, during the occurrence of the special figure low probability state and during the stop of the time saving control).
Then, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206 during the occurrence of the playable state.
The "base ratio" is the number of game balls fired in the game area 30, a predetermined ball entry port (in this embodiment, starting ports 51 and 52, other winning openings 57a to 57c, an electric ball entry device 71, and the like. , The information is calculated based on the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the non-electric ball entry devices 72, 73). Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts (the number of prize balls paid out) to the number of out balls (the number of game balls launched).
In the present embodiment, the base ratio in the predetermined section (period) is calculated for each predetermined section (period). Then, as a predetermined section, a section in which a predetermined number of out balls (60,000 [balls] in the present embodiment) is detected (discharged) is defined. That is, each section is started according to the end of the previous section, and is ended when the number of out balls detected during the current section reaches a predetermined number (60,000 [balls]). Then, the CPU 210 calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each section.
In addition, a predetermined time may be specified as a predetermined section. That is, the CPU 210 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
"Number of out balls" refers to the number of out balls. The “out ball” refers to a game ball discharged from the game area 30. Specifically, the out ball is a game ball that has passed through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out switch 109).
The game ball discharged from the out port 58 may be used as an out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game ball discharged from the out port 58, and the game ball detected by the out switch 109 may be used as the out ball.
The "number of payouts" is the prize paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the starting ports 51 and 52, the other winning openings 57a to 57c, the electric ball entry device 71, and the non-electric ball entry devices 72 and 73. The total number of spheres.

(About the game state)
Next, the gaming state defined by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the contents of the gaming state. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the contents of a normal game. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an opening / closing pattern of an ordinary electric accessory and a distribution pattern of a distribution movable body.
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute a time saving control as an auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
As shown in FIG. 60, during the execution of the time reduction control, the probability of winning the "normal symbol hit" is improved by the ordinary symbol lottery described later as compared with the time reduction control being stopped. As a result, while the time saving control is stopped, the normal figure low probability state is set, and while the time saving control is being executed, the normal figure high probability state is set. Therefore, during the execution of the time saving control (during the occurrence of the high probability state of the normal figure), the normal symbol lottery (judgment of hitting the normal figure) is performed as compared with the case of stopping the time reduction control (during the occurrence of the low probability state of the normal figure). The frequency of winning (“per-match”) is improved.
That is, while the time saving control is stopped (during the occurrence of the low probability state of the normal figure), the probability of winning the "per normal figure" by the ordinary symbol lottery is set as the first probability. On the other hand, during the execution of the time saving control (during the occurrence of the high probability state of the normal figure), the probability of winning the "per normal figure" by the ordinary symbol lottery is set to the second probability higher than the first probability.
Specifically, while the time reduction control is stopped, the probability of winning the "normal symbol hit" by the ordinary symbol lottery is set to 0/65536. On the other hand, during the execution of the time reduction control, the probability of winning the "normal symbol hit" by the ordinary symbol lottery is set to 1 / 1.00001.

Further, during the execution of the time reduction control, the time for executing the variation display of the normal symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “normal symbol variation time”) becomes longer than that during the execution of the time reduction control. In other words, when the time reduction control is stopped, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than that during the execution of the time reduction control.
That is, in the present embodiment, as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the first fluctuation time corresponding to the stop of the time reduction control and the second fluctuation time corresponding to the execution of the time reduction control are defined. Then, as the second fluctuation time, a longer time as compared with the first fluctuation time is defined.
Specifically, 0.5 [s] is specified as the first fluctuation time. As a result, 0.5 [s] is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol while the time reduction control is stopped.
On the other hand, as the second fluctuation time, a time satisfying the condition of the following (Equation 1) is defined.
2nd fluctuation time> Special fluctuation time + Stop time + α ・ ・ ・ (Equation 1)
The "special fluctuation time" is the fluctuation time set for the "specific fluctuation". As will be described later, the "specific variation" is the first special symbol (first) executed after the end of the jackpot game state when the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. It is a variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol). Then, for the specific fluctuation, 10.0 [s] is uniformly set as the fluctuation time. Therefore, in this embodiment, 10.0 [s] is defined as the "special fluctuation time".
The "stop time" is the time when the stop display of the special symbol is executed. In the present embodiment, 0.5 [s] is uniformly set as the stop time.
“Α” is the theoretical time (maximum time) required from when one game ball passes through the start gate 41 to when it enters the second start port 52. In this embodiment, 10.0 [s] is defined as "α".
As described above, in the present embodiment, a time longer than 20.5 [s] is defined as the second fluctuation time. Specifically, 21.0 [s] is specified as the second fluctuation time. As a result, 21.0 [s] is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol during the execution of the time reduction control.

Further, during the execution of the time reduction control, it becomes more difficult for the game ball to enter the electric ball entry device 71 in the game state per normal drawing described later than when the time reduction control is stopped. In other words, when the time reduction control is stopped, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the electric ball entry device 71 in the game state per normal drawing as compared with the execution of the time reduction control.
On the other hand, during the execution of the time reduction control, each operation gate g1 by the game ball that has entered the electric ball entry device 71 (ball entry port 71a) in the game state per normal figure as compared with the time reduction control is stopped. It becomes difficult to pass g2. In other words, when the time reduction control is stopped, each operating gate g1 by the game ball that has entered the electric ball entry device 71 (ball entry port 71a) in the game state per normal figure as compared with the execution of the time reduction control. , G2 can easily pass through.
That is, in the present embodiment, as the opening / closing pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 71b during the occurrence of the gaming state per normal figure, the first opening / closing pattern corresponding to the stop of the time saving control and the second opening / closing pattern corresponding to the execution of the time saving control are executed. The opening and closing pattern is specified. Then, in the game state per normal figure that occurs (starts) while the time reduction control is stopped, the normal electric accessory 71b is displaced (opened / closed) by the first opening / closing pattern. On the other hand, in the game state per normal figure that occurs (starts) during the execution of the time reduction control, the ordinary electric accessory 71b is displaced (opened / closed) by the second opening / closing pattern.
As shown in FIG. 61 (a), in the first opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern corresponding to the time saving control being stopped), "ordinary electric accessory 71b is 0.1, depending on the start of the gaming state per normal drawing." After the "pre-control that is set to the closed state by 0.4 [s] after being set to the [s] open state" is executed 1 [times], the "ordinary electric accessory 71b is opened by 0.5 [s]". After the state is set, 4.2 [s] unit control to be closed is executed 10 [times]. Here, in the following description, in the first opening / closing pattern, the fact that the normal electric accessory 71b is opened by the unit control each time is referred to as "unit opening".
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), in the second opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern corresponding to the execution of the time saving control), "ordinary electric accessory 71b is 0" according to the start of the game state per normal drawing. .1 [s] After the open state, 1.4 [s] closed state "pre-control" is executed 1 [times], and then "normal electric accessory 71b is 2.8 [s]. ] After the open state, 2.0 [s] unit control to be closed is executed 1 [times]. Here, in the following description, in the second opening / closing pattern, the fact that the normal electric accessory 71b is opened by the unit control each time is referred to as "unit opening".
As a result, in the first opening / closing pattern, the total time during which the normal electric accessory 71b is opened is 5.1 [s]. On the other hand, in the second opening / closing pattern, the total time for the normal electric accessory 71b to be in the open state is 2.9 [s].
Therefore, during the execution of the time reduction control, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the electric ball entry device 71 in the game state per normal drawing. On the other hand, while the time reduction control is stopped, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the electric ball entry device 71 in the game state per normal drawing.

Further, in the present embodiment, one distribution pattern (hereinafter, referred to as "specific distribution pattern") is defined as the distribution pattern of the distribution movable body 71c during the occurrence of the game state per normal drawing. Then, regardless of whether the time reduction control is being executed or stopped, the distribution movable body 71c is displaced according to the specific distribution pattern in the game state per normal drawing.
As shown in FIG. 61 (c), in the specific distribution pattern, "pre-control that the distribution movable body 71c is set to the 0.5 [s] first state" according to the start of the game state per normal drawing. However, after 1 [times] execution, "unit control in which the distribution movable body 71c is in the 1.0 [s] second state and then in the 3.7 [s] first state" is It is executed 10 [times].
As a result, as shown in FIG. 61, when the ordinary electric accessory 71b is displaced (opened / closed) by the first opening / closing pattern, the distribution movable body 71c is changed from the first state to the first at the start of each unit opening. It is displaced to two states, and the distribution movable body 71c is displaced from the second state to the first state when 0.5 [s] elapses from the end of each unit opening. Then, the game ball that entered the ball entry port 71a during each unit opening is distributed to the second path r2 by the distribution movable body 71c, and passes through the respective operating gates g1 and g2. .. Therefore, during each unit opening, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 71a to pass through each of the operating gates g1 and g2.
On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory 71b is displaced (opened / closed) by the second opening / closing pattern, the distribution movable body 71c is displaced from the second state to the first state at the start of each unit opening, and each time. When 0.9 [s] elapses from the end of unit opening, the distribution movable body 71c is displaced from the first state to the second state. Then, the game ball that entered the ball entry port 71a during each unit opening is distributed to the first path r1 by the distribution movable body 71c, and does not pass through the respective operating gates g1 and g2. .. Therefore, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball that has entered the ball entry port 71a to pass through each of the operating gates g1 and g2 during each unit opening.
Therefore, while the time reduction control is stopped, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball that has entered the electric ball entry device 71 (ball entry port 71a) to pass through each of the operating gates g1 and g2 in the game state per normal drawing. .. On the other hand, during the execution of the time reduction control, it is difficult (impossible) to pass each operating gate g1 and g2 by the game ball that has entered the electric ball entry device 71 (ball entry port 71a) in the game state per normal drawing. Become.
Further, during the execution of the time reduction control, the time for executing the variation display of the special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “the variation time of the special symbol”) is shortened as compared with the time when the time reduction control is stopped.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the special symbol low probability state and the special symbol high probability state are defined as the gaming states related to the winning probability of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery and second special symbol lottery) described later. Has been done.
Then, the probability of winning the "big hit" by the special symbol lottery (1st special symbol lottery and 2nd special symbol lottery) changes depending on whether the special symbol low probability state is occurring or the special symbol high probability state is occurring. To do.
That is, during the occurrence of the special symbol low probability state, the probability of winning the "big hit" by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is the first probability (probability according to the set value). ). On the other hand, during the occurrence of the special symbol high probability state, the probability of winning the "big hit" by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is higher than the first probability (second probability). Probability according to the set value).
On the other hand, regarding the probability of winning a "small hit" by the special symbol lottery (1st special symbol lottery and 2nd special symbol lottery), the probability of winning the special symbol low probability state and the occurrence of the special symbol high probability state are Does not change.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko machine 1 defines four gaming states (specifically, "gaming state A" to "gaming state D").
The "gaming state A" is a gaming state in which the time saving control is stopped (during the occurrence of the low-probability state in the normal figure) and during the occurrence of the low-probability state in the special figure.
The "gaming state B" is a gaming state in which the time saving control is being executed (during the occurrence of the high probability state of the normal figure) and during the occurrence of the high probability state of the special figure.
The "gaming state C" is a gaming state in which the time saving control is stopped (during the occurrence of the low probability state of the normal figure) and during the occurrence of the special figure high probability state.
The "gaming state D" is a gaming state in which the time saving control is being executed (during the occurrence of the high probability state in the normal figure) and during the occurrence of the low probability state in the special figure.

(About various lottery)
Next, various lottery executed by the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of the jackpot symbol and the number of time reductions (the gaming state that shifts after the end of the jackpot gaming state). FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the relationship between the type of the small hit symbol and the continuation status of the time saving control.
In addition, FIG. 6A shows the winning type selected when the "big hit" is won by the first special symbol lottery, and the number of time reductions corresponding to each winning type (the game state that shifts after the end of the big hit game state). 6 (b) shows the winning type selected when the "big hit" is won by the second special symbol lottery, and the number of time reductions corresponding to each winning type (after the end of the big hit game state). It shows the relationship with the transitioning game state).
In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate 41.
In the pachinko machine 1, as a result of the ordinary symbol lottery, "per normal drawing" and "missing" are defined.
In the normal symbol lottery (judgment of winning a normal figure) executed while the time reduction control is stopped (during the occurrence of a low probability state of a normal figure), the probability of being judged as "winning a normal figure" (winning) is 0/65536. ..
On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery (judgment of winning a normal figure) executed while the time reduction control is being executed (during the occurrence of a high probability state of a normal figure), the probability of being judged as "winning a normal figure" (winning) is 1/1. It becomes .00001.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, "1 per normal symbol"("1 per normal symbol") is selected as the winning type (type of symbol per normal symbol) selected when the "per regular symbol" is won by the ordinary symbol lottery. ) Only is specified.
When "1 per normal figure" is won, the normal symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed at "1 per normal figure" in the normal symbol display device.
On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is lost (in the case of "missing"), the normal symbol is controlled to be stopped and displayed at the "missing symbol" in the normal symbol display device.
If "1 per normal figure" is won, a game state per normal figure is generated. Then, in the game state per normal drawing, the normal electric accessory 71b is displaced (opened) from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the electric ball entry device 71 (ball entry port 71a). ..
As described above, in the normal game state, the electric accessory 71b is opened / closed (displaced) in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. At this time, while the time saving control is stopped, the ordinary electric accessory 71b is opened and closed in the first opening / closing pattern. On the other hand, during the execution of the time saving control, the ordinary electric accessory 71b is opened and closed in the second opening / closing pattern. Further, as described above, in the game state per normal drawing, the distribution movable body 71c is displaced in a specific distribution pattern.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the first special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the first starting port 51, and the second special symbol lottery is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 52. A special symbol lottery is executed.
In the pachinko machine 1, as a result of the first special symbol lottery, "big hit", "small hit", and "missing" are defined. On the other hand, as a result of the second special symbol lottery, "big hit", "small hit", and "missing" are defined.
As a result of the first special symbol lottery, a configuration in which "small hit" is not specified may be used.

The probability of winning a "small hit" by the first special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination) is 1/21. On the other hand, the probability of winning a "small hit" by the second special symbol lottery (special symbol hit determination) is 1 / 1.1.
The probability of winning a "big hit" by the special symbol lottery (1st special symbol lottery and 2nd special symbol lottery) is 1/315 (varies according to the set value) when the special symbol low probability state is occurring. When the special figure high probability state is occurring, it becomes 1/65 (varies according to the set value).
Here, as described above, the probability of winning the "big hit" by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) varies depending on the set value. In addition, the probability of winning the "big hit" by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) may not change according to the set value.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6A, in the pachinko machine 1, "big hit 1" and "big hit 1" and "big hit 1" are selected as the winning types (types of big hit symbols) selected when the "big hit" is won by the first special symbol lottery. "Big hit 2"("Big hit symbol 1" and "Big hit symbol 2") is specified.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6B, "big hit 3" to "big hit 6"("big hit 6"("big hit 6") are selected as the winning types (types of big hit symbols) selected when the "big hit" is won by the second special symbol lottery. "Big hit symbol 3" to "Big hit symbol 6") are specified.
Further, as shown in FIG. 7, as the winning type (type of small hit symbol) selected when the "small hit" is won by the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, "small hit 1" to "Small hit 3"("small hit symbol 1" to "small hit symbol 3") is specified.

When the "big hit 1" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit symbol 1" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display area A, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "latent symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, as for the "hidden symbol", for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the same, such as "2, 2, 2". The display mode is such that the second effect symbol z2, which is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4, shows a predetermined color while being aligned with "number symbols" indicating even numbers.
When the "big hit 2" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit symbol 2" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display area A, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "latent symbol" is stopped and displayed.
When the "big hit 3" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit symbol 3" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display area B, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "normal symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, in the "normal symbol", for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the same, such as "4, 4, 4". The display mode is such that the second effect symbol z2, which is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4, is aligned with the "number symbols" indicating even numbers, and shows a predetermined color.
When the "big hit 4" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit symbol 4" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display area B, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "chance symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, as for the "chance symbol", for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the same, such as "7, 7, 7". The display mode is such that the second effect symbol z2, which is stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4, shows a predetermined color while being aligned with "number symbols" indicating odd numbers.
When the "big hit 5" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit symbol 5" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display area B, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "chance symbol" is stopped and displayed.
When the "big hit 6" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "big hit symbol 6" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device. Further, in the effect symbol display area B, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "chance symbol" is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, when "small hit 1" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to "small hit symbol 1" is stopped in the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device or special figure 2 display device). Is displayed. Further, in the effect symbol display areas A and B, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, the "small hit symbol" is defined as, for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display positions of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, such as "7, 8, 7". The combination has the regularity of the above, and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4 shows a predetermined color.
When "small hit 2" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to "small hit symbol 2" is stopped and displayed on the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device or special figure 2 display device). To. Further, in the effect symbol display areas A and B, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed.
When "small hit 3" is won, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to "small hit symbol 3" is stopped and displayed on the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device or special figure 2 display device). To. Further, in the effect symbol display areas A and B, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) is lost (in the case of "missing"), the special symbol display device (special symbol 1 display device or special symbol 2 display device) , The stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed. Further, in the effect symbol display areas A and B, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "outlier symbol" is stopped and displayed.
Here, as for the "outlier symbol", for example, the first effect symbol z1 stopped and displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 is stopped and displayed in at least one area such as "1, 6, 9". The number indicated by the displayed "number symbol" is a different combination from the number indicated by the "number symbol" stopped and displayed in another area, and the second effect symbol z2 stopped and displayed in the second effect symbol display area a4. Is a display mode showing a predetermined color.

When "Big hit 1" to "Big hit 6"("Big hit symbol 1" to "Big hit symbol 6") are won, a big hit gaming state occurs. Then, in the big hit game state, the special electric accessory 55a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the big winning opening 55.
Specifically, a predetermined number of round games are executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. At this time, if the "big hit 1", "big hit 2" or "big hit 4" is won, the number of round games is set to 4 [times]. When "Big hit 3" or "Big hit 5" is won, the number of round games is set to 7 [times]. If the "big hit 6" is won, the number of round games is set to 10 [times].
In addition, when "big hit 1" to "big hit 6" are won, the maximum opening time of the special electric accessory 55a in each round game is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment). Set.
In each round game, (1) the maximum opening time has elapsed since the special electric accessory 55a was opened, and (2) the game ball to the large winning opening 55 during the execution of the round game. It is terminated when one of the conditions of the number of balls entered reaches a predetermined upper limit (10 [balls] in the present embodiment) is satisfied.

When "Big hit 1" to "Big hit 6" are won, the first round game among the predetermined round games executed during the occurrence of the big hit game state is the "V round game".
In the "V round game", the distribution means is displaced from the non-V passing state to the V passing state.
At this time, if the "big hit 1" or "big hit 3" is won, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 55 to pass through the V region during the execution of the V round game. Then, the sorting means is displaced from the non-V passing state to the V passing state.
As a result, when the "big hit 1" or the "big hit 3" is won, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. Therefore, "big hit 1" and "big hit 3" are practically winning types in which the special figure high probability state does not occur after the end of the big hit gaming state.
On the other hand, when "Big hit 2" or "Big hit 4" to "Big hit 6" is won, it is easy (possible) for the game ball that has entered the big winning opening 55 during the execution of the V round game to pass through the V region. In this embodiment, the sorting means is displaced from the non-V passing state to the V passing state.
As a result, when the "big hit 2" or the "big hit 4" to the "big hit 6" is won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. Therefore, "big hit 2" and "big hit 4" to "big hit 6" are winning types in which a special figure high probability state can occur after the end of the big hit gaming state.
Here, among the predetermined round games executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, in the other round games other than the V round game, the distribution means is displaced from the non-V passing state to the V passing state. Never. As a result, it becomes impossible for the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 55 during the execution of other round games other than the V round game to pass through the V region.

If the passage of the V region by the game ball is not detected during the occurrence of the big hit game state, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is regarded as the special figure low probability state.
On the other hand, when the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the big hit game state, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is regarded as the special figure high probability state.
The special figure high probability state is started in response to the end of the big hit game state, and (1) the number of special figure hit determinations executed during the occurrence of the special figure high probability state (during the occurrence of the special figure high probability state). The number of times the notification display of the special symbol is executed has reached a predetermined number of probable changes (10000 [times] in this embodiment) (the variation display of the special symbol started during the occurrence of the special symbol high probability state). One of the following conditions is satisfied: (2) the next jackpot game state is started (the stop display of the "big hit symbol" is completed). It will be terminated accordingly.
That is, in the present embodiment, the special figure high probability state started in response to the end of the big hit game state is substantially until the start of the next big hit game state (the end of the stop display of the next "big hit symbol"). Will be continued.
In addition, the special figure high probability state may be started at the end of the big hit game state and may be ended at the start of the next big hit game state (the end of the stop display of the "big hit symbol").

Here, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with the limiter function. However, the pachinko machine 1 may be configured to have a limiter function.
The "limiter function" is a function that limits the number of times that the control that causes the special figure high probability state is continuously performed according to the end of the big hit game state.
Specifically, in a pachinko machine equipped with a limiter function, at the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is determined whether or not the game ball has detected the passage of the V region during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state.
Then, when it is determined that the passage of the V region by the game ball has not been detected, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the limiter number counter.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected, "1" is added to the value of the limiter count counter, and then the value of the limiter count counter becomes a predetermined reference value (this implementation). In the form, it is determined whether or not "4") has been reached. When it is determined that the value of the limiter count counter has not reached a predetermined reference value, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is set to the special figure high probability state, while the value of the limiter counter is set. When it is determined that the predetermined reference value has been reached, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is regarded as the special figure low probability state. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the value of the limiter count counter has reached a predetermined reference value, 0 [times] is set as the number of time reductions.
As a result, when it is determined that the value of the limiter count counter has reached a predetermined reference value, the game after the end of the jackpot game state is detected even though the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected. The state is a special figure low probability state and a state in which the time saving control is stopped (normal figure low probability state).

Further, at the end of the jackpot game state, a predetermined number of time reductions is set. Then, after the end of the jackpot game state, the time reduction control is executed according to the set number of time reductions.
As shown in FIG. 6, when the "big hit 1" or the "big hit 3" is won, regardless of whether or not the game ball has detected the passage of the V region during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and the special figure hit. Regardless of the game state at the time of execution of the determination, 100 [times] is set as the number of time reductions.
On the other hand, when "Big hit 2", "Big hit 4" or "Big hit 5" is won, the number of time reductions is 10000 [times] or 100 [, regardless of the game state at the time of executing the special figure hit determination. Times] is set. At this time, if the passage of the V region by the game ball during the occurrence of the big hit game state is detected, 10000 [times] is set as the number of time reductions, and the passage of the V region by the game ball during the occurrence of the big hit game state is set. If it is not detected, 100 [times] is set as the number of time reductions.
On the other hand, when the "big hit 6" is won, 1 [times] or 100 [times] is set as the number of time reductions regardless of the game state at the time of executing the special figure hit determination. At this time, if the passage of the V region by the game ball during the occurrence of the jackpot game state is detected, 1 [times] is set as the number of time reductions, and the passage of the V region by the game ball during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is set. If it is not detected, 100 [times] is set as the number of time reductions.
When 0 [times] is set as the number of time reductions, the time reduction control is not executed after the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, when 1 [times] or more is set as the number of time reductions, the time reduction control is executed after the end of the big hit game state.
The time reduction control is started in response to the end of the jackpot game state, and (1) the number of special figure hit determinations executed during the time reduction control has reached the set number of time reductions (started during the time reduction control). The number of times of variable display of special symbols has reached the set number of time reductions, or the number of times of notification display of special symbols executed during the time reduction control has reached the set number of time reductions), and (2) The next big hit game state is started (the stop display of the "big hit symbol" is finished), and the game is finished when one of the conditions is satisfied.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, it is determined whether or not to end the time saving control at both the timing of disclosure of the variation display of the special symbol (when the start determination is executed) and the end of the stop display of the special symbol. Is executed.
Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a first time saving counter and a second time saving counter as time saving counters.
Then, during the execution of the time reduction control, the value of the first time reduction counter is updated at the start of the variation display of each special symbol (when the special symbol hit determination is executed), and the value of the updated first time reduction counter is updated. Based on, it is determined whether or not to end the time saving control. Then, when it is determined that the time saving control is terminated, the time saving control is terminated.
In addition, during the execution of the time reduction control, the value of the second time reduction counter is updated at the end of the stop display of each special symbol (when the stop time elapses), and is based on the updated value of the second time reduction counter. Therefore, it is determined whether or not to end the time saving control. Then, when it is determined that the time saving control is terminated, the time saving control is terminated.
As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, the time saving control is terminated according to the value of any of the time saving counters of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter becoming "0". At this time, if the value of the first time reduction counter becomes "0" before the value of the second time reduction counter becomes "0", at the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol (execution of the special symbol hit determination). At (hours), the time saving control is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the second time reduction counter becomes "0" before the value of the first time reduction counter becomes "0", at the end of the stop display of the special symbol (when the stop time elapses). , The time saving control is terminated.

As described above, when "Big hit 1" or "Big hit 3" is won, regardless of whether or not the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and the special figure hit determination is made. Regardless of the game state at the time of execution, at the end of the jackpot game state, the above-mentioned number of time reductions (100 [times] in this embodiment) is set as the value of the first time reduction counter, and the second time reduction counter As the value, the above-mentioned number of time reductions (100 [times] in this embodiment) is set.
On the other hand, when "Big hit 2", "Big hit 4" or "Big hit 5" is won and the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, the special figure hit determination is executed. Regardless of the game state at the time, at the end of the jackpot game state, the above-mentioned number of time reductions (10000 [times] in this embodiment) is set as the value of the first time reduction counter, and the value of the second time reduction counter. As the above-mentioned number of time reductions (10000 [times] in this embodiment) is set.
On the other hand, if "Big hit 2", "Big hit 4" or "Big hit 5" is won and the passage of the V region by the game ball is not detected during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, the special figure hit determination is made. Regardless of the game state at the time of execution, at the end of the jackpot game state, the above-mentioned number of time reductions (100 [times] in this embodiment) is set as the value of the first time reduction counter, and the second time reduction counter As the value, the above-mentioned number of time reductions (100 [times] in this embodiment) is set.
As described above, when "Big hit 1" to "Big hit 5" are won, the value set in the value of the first time reduction counter (predetermined number of time reductions) and the second time reduction counter at the end of the big hit game state The value set in the value (predetermined number of time reductions) is the same. As a result, when the "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" are won, the time saving control is terminated at the start of the variation display of the special symbol (when the special symbol hit determination is executed).
On the other hand, if the "big hit 6" is won and the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the big hit game state, the big hit game is performed regardless of the game state at the time of executing the special figure hit determination. At the end of the state, a larger value (100 [times] in this embodiment) is set as the value of the first counter as compared with the above-mentioned number of time reductions (1 [times] in this embodiment). As the value of the second time reduction counter, the above-mentioned number of time reductions (1 [times] in this embodiment) is set.
As a result, when the "big hit 6" is won and the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the big hit game state, it is set to the first time reduction counter at the end of the big hit game state. The value (100 [times] in this embodiment) becomes larger than the value set in the second time reduction counter (predetermined number of time reductions). As a result, when the "big hit 6" is won and the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, the stop display of the special symbol ends (when the stop time elapses). In addition, the time saving control will be terminated.
On the other hand, if the "big hit 6" is won and the passage of the V region by the game ball is not detected during the occurrence of the big hit game state, the big hit is regardless of the game state at the time of executing the special figure hit determination. At the end of the gaming state, the above-mentioned number of time reductions (100 [times] in this embodiment) is set as the value of the first time reduction counter, and the above-mentioned number of time reductions (this implementation) is set as the value of the second time reduction counter. In the form, 100 [times]) is set.
As a result, if the "big hit 6" is won and the passage of the V region by the game ball is not detected during the occurrence of the big hit game state, the value of the first time reduction counter is set at the end of the big hit game state. The set value (predetermined number of time reductions) and the value set in the value of the second time reduction counter (predetermined number of time reductions) are the same. As a result, if the "big hit 6" is won and the passage of the V region by the game ball is not detected during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, at the start of the variation display of the special symbol (special symbol hit determination). At the time of execution), the time saving control will be terminated.

When "small hit 1" to "small hit 3"("small hit symbol 1" to "small hit symbol 3") are won, a small hit gaming state occurs. Then, in the small hit game state, the special electric accessory 55a is displaced from the closed state to the open state, and the game ball can enter the large winning opening 55.
Specifically, a predetermined number of small hit games are executed during the occurrence of the small hit game state. At this time, when "small hit 1" to "small hit 3" are won, the number of small hit games is set to 1 [times].
In addition, when "small hit 1" to "small hit 3" are won, the maximum opening time of the special electric accessory 55a in each small hit game is a predetermined time (1.8 [s in this embodiment). ]) Is set.
Each small hit game consists of (1) the maximum opening time has passed since the special electric accessory 55a was opened, and (2) the game to the large winning opening 55 during the execution of the small hit game. It is terminated when one of the conditions of the number of balls entering the ball reaches a predetermined upper limit (8 [balls] in the present embodiment) is satisfied.

In the present embodiment, the gaming state (execution status of the time saving control) can change before and after the small hit gaming state.
Specifically, the main control board 200 is configured to include a rotation speed counter after a big hit. The post-big hit rotation speed counter counts the post-big hit rotation speed. Here, the "rotation speed after the jackpot" is the number of notification displays (variation display and stop display) of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game state.
Then, when the time saving control is stopped at the end of the small hit game state, the state in which the time saving control is stopped is maintained.
On the other hand, if the time saving control is being executed at the end of the small hit game state, the winning small hit type and the "small hit" are determined at the end of the small hit game state (or at the start of the small hit game state). The game state (specifically, "game state B" or "game state D") of the special figure hit determination, etc., and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit Based on this, it is determined whether or not to end the time saving control.
At this time, as shown in FIG. 7, when the winning small hit type is "small hit 1", the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit is irrespective of the game state at the end of the small hit game state. Regardless, the time reduction control is continued even after the end of the small hit game state.
On the other hand, when the winning small hit type is "small hit 2" and the gaming state at the end of the small hit gaming state is "game state B", regardless of the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit. , The time saving control is terminated according to the termination of the small hit game state.
On the other hand, when the winning small hit type is "small hit 2" and the gaming state at the end of the small hit gaming state is "game state D", regardless of the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit. , Even after the end of the small hit game state, the time saving control is continued.
On the other hand, when the winning small hit type is "small hit 3" and the gaming state at the end of the small hit gaming state is "game state D", regardless of the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit. , Even after the end of the small hit game state, the time saving control is continued.
On the other hand, the winning small hit type is "small hit 3", the gaming state at the end of the small hit gaming state is "game state B", and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit ≤ 100 [times. ], The time saving control is terminated according to the termination of the small hit game state.
On the other hand, the winning small hit type is "small hit 3", the game state at the end of the small hit game state is "game state B", and 100 [times] <rotation speed counter after big hit. If it is a value, the time saving control is continued even after the end of the small hit game state.

As described above, when "small hit 1" is won, regardless of the game state at the end of the small hit game state, and regardless of the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit, before and after the small hit game state, The gaming state does not change.
On the other hand, when the "small hit 2" is won, the gaming state may change according to the gaming state at the end of the small hit gaming state. At this time, if the game state at the end of the small hit game state is "game state A", "game state C", or "game state D", the small hit game state regardless of the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit. The game state does not change before and after. On the other hand, when the gaming state at the end of the small hit gaming state is "gaming state B", the gaming state is changed to the "gaming state" according to the end of the small hit gaming state regardless of the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit. It changes from "B" to "gaming state C".
On the other hand, when "small hit 3" is won, the game state may change according to the game state at the end of the small hit game state and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit. At this time, if the game state at the end of the small hit game state is "game state A", "game state C", or "game state D", the small hit game state regardless of the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit. The game state does not change before and after. On the other hand, when the game state at the end of the small hit game state is "game state B" and 100 [times] <the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit, the game state is before and after the small hit game state. It doesn't change. On the other hand, when the game state at the end of the small hit game state is "game state B" and the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit is ≤100 [times], the game is played according to the end of the small hit game state. The state changes from "game state B" to "game state C".
With such a configuration, it is possible to shift the game state (specifically, shift from the "game state B" to the "game state C") when the "small hit" is won.

(About the fluctuation time of the special symbol)
Next, the variation time of the special symbol selected and set during the occurrence of each game state (“game state A” to “game state D”) will be described.
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a variation time of a special symbol selected and set during the occurrence of each gaming state.
Note that FIG. 8A shows the fluctuation time of the special symbol selected / set during the occurrence of the “game state A”, and FIG. 8B shows the variation time selected / set during the occurrence of the “game state B”. The fluctuation time of the special symbol to be played is shown, FIG. 8 (c) shows the fluctuation time of the special symbol selected and set during the occurrence of the “game state C”, and FIG. 8 (d) shows the “game state D”. Indicates the fluctuation time of the special symbol selected and set during the occurrence of.

The fluctuation time (variation mode / variation pattern) of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) at the time of "big hit" is selected by the winning variation pattern determination process described later. Then, in the winning variation pattern determination process, the hold type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the game state (“game state A” to “game state D”), the type of the stop symbol, and The fluctuation time (variation mode / fluctuation pattern) of the special symbol is selected based on.
On the other hand, the fluctuation time (variation mode / fluctuation pattern) of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) at the time of "missing" is selected by the fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of defeat, which will be described later. Then, in the change pattern determination process at the time of defeat, the hold type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the number of holds (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number), and the game state ("game state"). The fluctuation time (variation mode / variation pattern) of the special symbol is selected based on "A" to "game state D").
On the other hand, the fluctuation time (variation mode / variation pattern) of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) at the time of "small hit" is one of the winning variation pattern determination process and the losing variation pattern determination process. , Is selected by either process. At this time, based on the game state (“game state A” to “game state D”) and the hold type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the winning variation pattern determination process and One of the processing for determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of defeat is selected.
This eliminates the need to provide a dedicated process for determining the fluctuation time (variation mode / fluctuation pattern) of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) at the time of "small hit", and simplifies the process. It becomes possible to change.

Specifically, when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state A" is "small hit", the first special symbol is determined by the variation pattern determination process at the time of defeat. Fluctuation time is selected. As a result, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state A" is a variable effect depending on whether the result is a "small hit" or a "missing". The aspects (contents) can be the same.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state A" is "small hit", the variation of the second special symbol is changed by the winning variation pattern determination process. The time is selected. As a result, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state A" is a variable effect depending on whether the result is a "small hit" or a "big hit". The aspects (contents) can be the same.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state B" is "small hit", the variation of the first special symbol is changed by the winning variation pattern determination process. The time is selected. As a result, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state B" is a variable effect depending on whether the result is a "small hit" or a "missing". The aspects (contents) can be the same.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state B" is "small hit", the change of the second special symbol is changed by the change pattern determination process at the time of defeat. The time is selected. As a result, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state B" is a variable effect depending on whether the result is a "small hit" or a "big hit". The aspects (contents) can be the same.

On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state C" is "small hit", the variation of the first special symbol is changed by the winning variation pattern determination process. The time is selected. As a result, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state C" is a variable effect depending on whether the result is a "small hit" or a "big hit". The aspects (contents) can be the same.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state C" is "small hit", the variation of the second special symbol is changed by the winning variation pattern determination process. The time is selected. As a result, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state C" is a variable effect depending on whether the result is a "small hit" or a "big hit". The aspects (contents) can be the same.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state D" is "small hit", the variation of the first special symbol is changed by the winning variation pattern determination process. The time is selected. As a result, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state D" is a variable effect depending on whether the result is a "small hit" or a "big hit". The aspects (contents) can be the same.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state D" is "small hit", the change of the second special symbol is changed by the change pattern determination process at the time of defeat. The time is selected. As a result, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state D" is a variable effect depending on whether the result is a "small hit" or a "missing". The aspects (contents) can be the same.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, "normal fluctuation", "long fluctuation", "short fluctuation", "dedicated fluctuation", and "dedicated fluctuation" are grouped as a group of fluctuation modes (combination of fluctuation mode / fluctuation pattern) of special symbols. "Special variation" is stipulated.
The "normal fluctuation" is a group to which the fluctuation mode to which the normal fluctuation time is associated belongs. In the present embodiment, 4.0 [s] to 180.0 [s] are defined as the fluctuation time (normal fluctuation time) corresponding to each fluctuation mode belonging to the "normal fluctuation".
The "long fluctuation" is a group to which a fluctuation mode to which a longer fluctuation time (hereinafter referred to as "long fluctuation time") is associated with a fluctuation mode belonging to another group belongs. In the present embodiment, 590.0 [s] is defined as the fluctuation time (long fluctuation time) corresponding to each fluctuation mode belonging to "long fluctuation".
The "short fluctuation" is a group to which the fluctuation mode to which the short fluctuation time (hereinafter referred to as "short fluctuation time") is associated with the normal fluctuation time belongs. In the present embodiment, 3.0 [s] to 10.0 [s] are defined as the fluctuation time (short fluctuation time) corresponding to each fluctuation mode belonging to "short fluctuation".
The "special variation" is a variation mode dedicated to the "specific variation". In the present embodiment, as a "specific variation", when the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, the first special symbol (first) executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol) is specified. Then, a special variation is selected as the variation mode of the "specific variation". In the present embodiment, 10.0 [s] is defined as the fluctuation time (special fluctuation time) corresponding to each fluctuation mode belonging to the "special fluctuation".
The "dedicated variation" is a variation mode dedicated to the "predetermined variation". In the present embodiment, as the "predetermined variation", the second special is executed when the "small hit" or the "missing" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the "game state B". The second is executed when the "small hit" or "missing" is won based on the fluctuation display of the symbol (excluding the specific fluctuation) and the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "game state C". The variable display of special symbols is stipulated. Then, a dedicated variation is selected as the variation mode of the "predetermined variation". In the present embodiment, 1.0 [s] to 10.0 [s] are defined as the fluctuation time (dedicated fluctuation time) corresponding to each fluctuation mode belonging to the “dedicated fluctuation”.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of the “game state A” is “big hit”, “small hit”, or “missing”. If, "normal variation" is selected as the variation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time is in the range of 4.0 [s] to 180.0 [s]. At this time, when the result of the special figure hit determination is "big hit", as the fluctuation mode, among the fluctuation modes belonging to "normal fluctuation", the fluctuation mode corresponding to "big hit" (variation time = 120.0 [s]] (Within the range of ~ 180.0 [s]) is selected. On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination is "small hit" or "missing", as the fluctuation mode, among the fluctuation modes belonging to "normal fluctuation", the fluctuation mode corresponding to "missing" (variation time = 4. Within the range of 0 [s] to 180.0 [s]) is selected.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state A" is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing", the variation mode is "long". "Variation" is selected. As a result, the fluctuation time becomes 590.0 [s].
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8B, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state B" is "big hit", "small hit", or "small hit". If it is "off" and the fluctuation corresponds to "specific fluctuation", "special fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time becomes 10.0 [s].
On the other hand, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state B" is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing", and the fluctuation is "specific". If it does not correspond to "variation", "long variation" is selected as the variation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time becomes 590.0 [s].
On the other hand, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state B" is "big hit", "small hit", or "missing", and the fluctuation is "specific". If it corresponds to "variation", "special variation" is selected as the variation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time becomes 10.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state B" is "big hit" and the change does not correspond to the "specific change", the variation mode is "Normal fluctuation" (a fluctuation mode corresponding to "big hit" among the fluctuation modes belonging to "normal fluctuation") is selected. As a result, the fluctuation time is in the range of 120.0 [s] to 180.0 [s].
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state B" is "small hit" or "missing", and the change does not correspond to "specific change". , "Dedicated variation" is selected as the variation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time is in the range of 1.0 [s] to 10.0 [s].
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8C, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state C" is "big hit", "small hit" or "missing". If, "long variation" is selected as the variation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time becomes 590.0 [s].
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state C" is "big hit", the variation mode belongs to "normal variation"("normalvariation"). Of the variation modes, the variation mode corresponding to the "big hit") is selected. As a result, the fluctuation time is in the range of 120.0 [s] to 180.0 [s].
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state C" is "small hit" or "missing", "dedicated variation" is selected as the variation mode. Will be done. As a result, the fluctuation time is in the range of 1.0 [s] to 10.0 [s].
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8D, the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 1 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state D" is "big hit", "small hit" or "missing". If, "long variation" is selected as the variation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time becomes 590.0 [s].
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state D" is "big hit", the variation mode belongs to "normal variation"("normalvariation"). Of the variation modes, the variation mode corresponding to the "big hit") is selected. As a result, the fluctuation time is in the range of 120.0 [s] to 180.0 [s].
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination based on the special figure 2 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state D" is "small hit" or "missing", "short variation" is selected as the variation mode. Will be done. As a result, the fluctuation time is in the range of 3.0 [s] to 10.0 [s].

(About transition of game state)
Next, the transition of the gaming state will be described.
As shown in FIG. 6A, "Big hit 1" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "Game state A" to "Game state D", and the big hit game state When the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence, the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the "game state B".
On the other hand, "Big hit 1" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "Game state A" to "Game state D", and the V region by the game ball during the occurrence of the big hit game state. If the passage of is not detected, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is the "gaming state D".
Here, as described above, when the "big hit 1" is won, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. Therefore, it becomes impossible for the player to intentionally select whether or not the game ball passes through the V region during the occurrence of the big hit game state.
Therefore, when the "big hit 1" is won based on the first special symbol lottery, the passage of the V region by the game ball is not detected during the occurrence of the big hit game state, and the big hit game state is substantially not detected. The game state after the end of is the "game state D".

"Big hit 2" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "game state A" to "game state D", and the V region is passed by the game ball during the occurrence of the big hit game state. When is detected, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes the "gaming state B".
On the other hand, "Big hit 2" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "Game state A" to "Game state D", and the V region by the game ball during the occurrence of the big hit game state. If the passage of is not detected, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is the "gaming state D".
Here, as described above, when the "big hit 2" is won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. Therefore, the player can intentionally select whether or not the game ball passes through the V region during the occurrence of the big hit game state.
Therefore, when the "big hit 2" is won based on the first special symbol lottery, the player proceeds with the game so that the game ball passes through the V region during the occurrence of the big hit game state. Depending on whether or not to do so), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state changes. At this time, if the game is advanced so that the game ball passes through the V region, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is advantageous to the player.

"Big hit 3" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "game state A" to "game state D", and the V region is passed by the game ball during the occurrence of the big hit game state. When is detected, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes the "gaming state B".
On the other hand, "Big hit 3" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "Game state A" to "Game state D", and the V region by the game ball during the occurrence of the big hit game state. If the passage of is not detected, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is the "gaming state D".
Here, as described above, when the "big hit 3" is won, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. Therefore, it becomes impossible for the player to intentionally select whether or not the game ball passes through the V region during the occurrence of the big hit game state.
Therefore, when the "big hit 3" is won based on the second special symbol lottery, the passage of the V region by the game ball is not detected during the occurrence of the big hit game state, and the big hit game state is substantially not detected. The game state after the end of is the "game state D".

"Big hit 4" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "game state A" to "game state D", and the V region is passed by the game ball during the occurrence of the big hit game state. When is detected, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes the "gaming state B".
On the other hand, "Big hit 4" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "Game state A" to "Game state D", and the V region by the game ball during the occurrence of the big hit game state. If the passage of is not detected, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is the "gaming state D".
Here, as described above, when the "big hit 4" is won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. Therefore, the player can intentionally select whether or not the game ball passes through the V region during the occurrence of the big hit game state.
Therefore, when the "big hit 4" is won based on the second special symbol lottery, the game progresses by the player (the game proceeds so that the game ball passes through the V region during the occurrence of the big hit game state). Depending on whether or not to do so), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state changes. At this time, if the game is advanced so that the game ball passes through the V region, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is advantageous to the player.

"Big hit 5" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "game state A" to "game state D", and the V region is passed by the game ball during the occurrence of the big hit game state. When is detected, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes the "gaming state B".
On the other hand, "Big hit 5" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "Game state A" to "Game state D", and the V region by the game ball during the occurrence of the big hit game state. If the passage of is not detected, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is the "gaming state D".
Here, as described above, when the "big hit 5" is won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. Therefore, the player can intentionally select whether or not the game ball passes through the V region during the occurrence of the big hit game state.
Therefore, when the "big hit 5" is won based on the second special symbol lottery, the game progresses by the player (the game proceeds so that the game ball passes through the V region during the occurrence of the big hit game state). Depending on whether or not to do so), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state changes. At this time, if the game is advanced so that the game ball passes through the V region, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is advantageous to the player.

"Big hit 6" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "game state A" to "game state D", and the V region is passed by the game ball during the occurrence of the big hit game state. When is detected, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes the "gaming state B".
On the other hand, "Big hit 6" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "Game state A" to "Game state D", and the V region by the game ball during the occurrence of the big hit game state. If the passage of is not detected, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is the "gaming state D".
Here, as described above, when the "big hit 6" is won, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. Therefore, the player can intentionally select whether or not the game ball passes through the V region during the occurrence of the big hit game state.
Therefore, when the "big hit 6" is won based on the second special symbol lottery, the game progresses by the player (the game progresses so that the game ball passes through the V region during the occurrence of the big hit game state). Depending on whether or not to do so), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state changes. At this time, if the game is advanced so that the game ball passes through the V region, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is advantageous to the player.

(Simultaneous fluctuation of special symbols)
In the pachinko machine 1, the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the first special symbol on the special figure 1 display device and the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the second special symbol on the special figure 2 display device are displayed. It is possible to execute in parallel at the same time (at the same time).
That is, in the pachinko machine 1, one of the special figure 1 game information (first special symbol) and the special figure 2 game information (second special symbol) is not occurring in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. If the game information (special symbol) of is not in the stop display (during the stop time) of the "big hit symbol", the start determination (special symbol hit determination, special symbol symbol determination, special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, etc.) is performed for the other game information. ) Can be executed.

In particular, when the start determination based on one of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information is executed, the other game information is displayed in a variable manner (during the variable time) of the "big hit symbol". , The result of the start judgment based on the one game information cannot be set as "big hit" (big hit symbol) or "small hit" (small hit symbol), and is forcibly "off"("missingsymbol"). ).
For example, when the start determination based on the first game information is executed, if the variation is displayed (during the variation time) based on the second game information in which the "big hit symbol" is determined by the start determination, it is based on the first game information. The result of the start determination is forcibly set as "off" (off symbol).
On the other hand, when the start determination based on one of the game information of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information is executed, the other game information is being displayed (variable) in the "small hit symbol" or "missing symbol". In the case of (during time), the result of the start determination based on the one game information is not forced.
Here, in the present embodiment, when the start determination based on one of the game information of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information is executed, the other game information is displayed in a variable manner (variation) of the "big hit symbol". In the case of (during time), the special figure hit judgment (special figure big hit judgment and special figure small hit judgment) is not executed in the start judgment based on the one game information.
However, when the start determination based on one of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information is executed, the other game information is being displayed in a variable manner (during the variable time) of the "big hit symbol". , In the start judgment based on the one game information, after the special figure hit judgment (special figure big hit judgment and special figure small hit judgment) is executed, the result of the special figure hit judgment is rewritten to "missing". I do not care.

In addition, among the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information, one of the game information changes at the start of the stop display (stop time) of the "big hit symbol" or the "small hit symbol", and the other game information changes. If it is being displayed (during the fluctuating time), the other game information is forcibly changed to the "off symbol", the fluctuating display (floating time) is terminated, and the stop display (stop time) is displayed. Is started.
For example, if the variation display based on the second game information is being displayed at the start of the stop display based on the first game information for which the "big hit symbol" is determined by the start determination, the variation based on the second game information is forcibly displayed. The display is terminated, and the stop display based on the second game information is started. At this time, regardless of the result of the start determination based on the second game information, the "missing symbol" is forcibly stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information, at the start of the stop display (stop time) of the "missing symbol", the other game information is being displayed in a variable manner (during the variable time). ), The variable display (variable time) is continued for the other game information.

Here, regarding one of the game information of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information, at the start of the stop display (stop time) of the "big hit symbol" or the "small hit symbol", the other game information is When the fluctuation is being displayed (during the fluctuation time), the measurement of the fluctuation time may be interrupted for the other game information.
With such a configuration, with respect to one game information, the measurement of the interrupted fluctuation time is started for the other game information according to the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. At this time, while the big hit game state or the small hit game state is occurring for one game information, the measurement of the fluctuation time for the other game information is interrupted, but the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device or About the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) in the special symbol 2 display device) and the variable display of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display area (effect symbol display area A or effect symbol display area B). Is continued.
Alternatively, one of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information is being displayed in a variable manner (during the variable time) at the start of the stop display (stop time) of the "big hit symbol" and the other game information. ), The other game information is forcibly changed to the "off symbol", the fluctuation display (variation time) is terminated, the stop display (stop time) is started, and the special figure 1 Of the game information and special figure 2 game information, one of the game information is being displayed in a variable manner (during the variable time) at the start of the stop display (stop time) of the "small hit symbol", and the other game information is being displayed in a variable manner (during the variable time). In this case, the measurement of the fluctuation time may be interrupted for the other game information.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the gaming state is changed at the start of the variation display of the special symbol because it is possible to execute the simultaneous variation of the special symbol. In addition to this, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the gaming state is changed at the end of the stop display of the special symbol.
That is, during the execution of the time saving control, the value of the first time saving counter is updated at the start of the fluctuation display of each special symbol, and the time saving control is terminated based on the updated value of the first time saving counter. Whether or not it is determined. Then, when it is determined that the time saving control is terminated, the time saving control is terminated.
In addition, during the execution of the time reduction control, the value of the second time reduction counter is updated at the end of each stop display of the special symbol, and whether the time reduction control is terminated based on the updated value of the second time reduction counter. Whether or not it is determined. Then, when it is determined that the time saving control is terminated, the time saving control is terminated.
Further, during the occurrence of the special figure high probability state, the value of the probability variation counter is updated at the start of the fluctuation display of each special symbol, and the special figure high probability state is terminated based on the updated probability variation counter value. It is determined whether or not to do so. Then, when it is determined that the special figure high probability state is terminated, the special figure high probability state is terminated.

(About the progress of the game)
Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a transition of the gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 9, four gaming states (gaming sections) are defined in the pachinko machine 1, and four gaming states (“game state A”, “gaming state B”, and so on, while the game is in progress. One of the game states (“game state C” and “game state D”) is generated.
The advantages of the four game states are "game state C", "game state B", "game state D", and "game state A" (high advantage → low advantage) in order from the one with the highest advantage. It has become. Here, the "advantage" is a degree that is advantageous to the player.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1, if the "big hit" is won by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery), the jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter the big winning opening 55 is Occurs. Then, the player can acquire the prize ball by inserting the game ball into the large prize opening 55.
In addition, if a "small hit" is won by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), a small hit game state is generated in which a game ball can be entered into the large winning opening 55. .. Then, the player can acquire the prize ball by inserting the game ball into the large prize opening 55.
In addition, if the "normal symbol hit" is won by the ordinary symbol lottery, a game state per normal symbol is generated in which the game ball can be entered into the electric ball entry device 71. Then, the player can acquire the prize ball by inserting the game ball into the electric ball entry device 71.
Further, when the game balls that have entered the electric ball entry device 71 pass through the operating gates g1 and g2, the game balls can enter the non-electric ball entry devices 72 and 73. Then, the player can acquire the prize ball by inserting the game ball into each of the non-electric ball entry devices 72 and 73.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the special symbol high probability state is set as the game state regarding the winning probability (specifically, the probability of winning the "big hit") of the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). And the special figure low probability state are stipulated.
Then, during the occurrence of the special symbol high probability state, the probability of winning the "big hit" by the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) is compared with the occurrence of the special symbol low probability state. Will be higher.
As a result, there is a higher possibility that a big hit gaming state will occur during the occurrence of the special figure high probability state than during the occurrence of the special figure low probability state, which is advantageous to the player.
Regarding the probability of winning a "small hit" by the special symbol lottery (1st special symbol lottery or 2nd special symbol lottery), the probability of winning the special symbol high probability state is occurring, and the special symbol low probability state is occurring. Does not change.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, the game states related to the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery (specifically, the probability of winning the "normal symbol hit") are the normal symbol high probability state (the state in which the time saving control is being executed) and the normal symbol lottery. A low-probability state (a state in which time reduction control is stopped) is defined.
Then, during the occurrence of the high-probability state of the normal figure (during the execution of the time-saving control), compared with the occurrence of the low-probability state of the normal figure (during the stop of the time-saving control), the normal symbol lottery is performed to "per the normal figure". The probability of winning is high.
As a result, it is easier for the game ball to enter the electric ball entry device 71 during the occurrence of the normal figure high probability state than during the occurrence of the normal figure low probability state, so that the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed. While doing so, it becomes possible to proceed with the game, which is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as the types of the special symbol lottery (special symbol), the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol) and the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol) are defined.
Then, in the second special symbol lottery, the high probability of transition is higher than in the first special symbol lottery. Specifically, in the first special symbol lottery, the high probability transition probability is 50 [%]. On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery, the high probability transition probability is 60 [%].
As a result, the second special symbol lottery is more likely to cause a special symbol high probability state when the "big hit" is won than the first special symbol lottery, which is advantageous to the player.
The "high probability transition probability" is the probability that the "high probability jackpot symbol" will be selected when the "big hit" is won by the special symbol lottery.
The "high-accuracy jackpot symbol" is a type (winning type) of the "big hit symbol" that makes it easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. That is, the "high probability jackpot symbol" is substantially a type (winning type) of the "big hit symbol" in which the special figure high probability state occurs after the end of the jackpot game state.
The "low probability jackpot symbol" is a type (winning type) of the "big hit symbol" in which it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state. That is, the "low probability big hit symbol" is substantially a type (winning type) of the "big hit symbol" in which the special figure low probability state occurs after the end of the big hit game state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6A, "big hit symbol 1" and "big hit symbol 2" are defined as the winning types selected when the "big hit" is won by the first special symbol lottery. There is. Then, of the "big hit symbol 1" and the "big hit symbol 2", the "big hit symbol 1" is the "low accuracy jackpot symbol", and the "big hit symbol 2" is the "high accuracy jackpot symbol". There is. Further, the probability that "big hit symbol 2" is selected is 50 [%]. Therefore, the high probability transition probability of the first special symbol lottery is 50 [%].
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6B, "big hit symbol 3" to "big hit symbol 6" are defined as the winning types selected when the "big hit" is won by the second special symbol lottery. Then, among the "big hit symbols 3" to "big hit symbols 6", the "big hit symbol 3" is the "low accuracy jackpot symbol", and the "big hit symbols 4" to "big hit 6" are the "high accuracy jackpot symbols". It is a "design". Further, the probability that "big hit symbol 4" to "big hit symbol 6" is selected is 60 [%]. Therefore, the high probability transition probability of the second special symbol lottery is 60 [%].

"Game state A" is a normal game section.
In the pachinko machine 1, when the RAM clearing initialization process (steps S1-30) described later is executed, the “game state A” is generated.
Here, the first starting port 51 is an entry port (fixed entry port) that opens upward, and a game ball can enter the ball at all times. As a result, it is possible to obtain the opportunity of the first special symbol lottery by inserting the game ball into the first starting port 51 during the occurrence of the "game state A".
On the other hand, the second starting port 52 is an entry port (fixed entry port) that opens upward, and a game ball can enter the ball at all times. As a result, it is possible to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery by inserting the game ball into the second starting port 52 during the occurrence of the "game state A".
However, if the second special symbol lottery is executed during the occurrence of the "game state A", the "long fluctuation time" (specifically, 590.) Is used as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol regardless of the lottery result. 0 [s]) is selected.
As a result, even if the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery is acquired during the occurrence of "game state A", the time for variable display of the special symbol becomes longer, so that more second special symbols can be displayed in a short time. It becomes difficult to get a lottery opportunity.
Therefore, during the occurrence of the "game state A", in order to obtain the opportunity of the first special symbol lottery, the game ball is launched against the left route with the aim of entering the game ball into the first starting port 51. It will be.
Here, during the occurrence of the "game state A", if the "small hit" is won by the first special symbol lottery, the small hit game state is generated. However, even if the route for launching the game ball is changed from the left side route to the right side route when the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed, the game ball that has entered the right side route by the end of the small hit game state. However, it does not reach the grand prize opening 55. As a result, even if a "small hit" is won by the first special symbol lottery, it becomes difficult to obtain a prize ball based on the small hit game state.
Further, during the occurrence of the "game state A", the probability of winning the "big hit" by the first special symbol lottery is low (1/315 in this embodiment). As a result, the possibility that a jackpot game state will occur is reduced.
Further, during the occurrence of the "game state A", the probability of winning the "normal symbol hit" by the ordinary symbol lottery is low (0/65536 in the present embodiment). As a result, even if the game ball that has entered the right route passes through the start gate 41, it is less likely that a game state will occur per normal drawing.
As described above, it is unlikely that a big hit game state will occur during the occurrence of "game state A", and it will be difficult to obtain a prize ball based on the small hit game state. It is less likely that a gaming state will occur. As a result, the game will proceed with the aim of acquiring more opportunities for the first special symbol lottery in order to shift to a more advantageous gaming state. That is, the game ball is launched with respect to the left path with the aim of entering the game ball into the first starting port 51.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the "big hit 1" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the "game state A", the "big hit 1" is usually changed according to the end of the big hit game state. "Game state D" is generated.
On the other hand, when the "big hit 2" is won based on the first special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the "game state A", the "game state B" is usually changed according to the end of the big hit game state. Occurs.
In this way, during the occurrence of the "game state A", the game state shifts when the "big hit" is won. At this time, if the "big hit 1" is won, the game shifts to the "game state D", and if the "big hit 2" is won, the game shifts to the "game state B". In particular, it is more advantageous for the player to shift to the "game state B" than to shift to the "game state D".

The "game state D" is a game section for pulling back the "high accuracy jackpot symbol".
That is, as described above, the second starting port 52 is an entry port (fixed entry port) that opens upward, and a game ball can enter the ball at all times. As a result, it is possible to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery by inserting the game ball into the second starting port 52 during the occurrence of the "game state D".
In particular, in the second special symbol lottery, the high probability of transition is higher than in the first special symbol lottery. Further, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the occurrence of the "game state D", the "long fluctuation time" (specifically, 590.0 [s]] is used as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. ) Is never selected.
Therefore, during the occurrence of the "game state D", the game ball is launched against the right route with the aim of entering the game ball into the second starting port 52 in order to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery. It will be.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the "gaming state D", the probability of winning the "normal symbol hit" by the ordinary symbol lottery is high (1 / 1.00001 in this embodiment). As a result, every time the game ball that has entered the right path passes through the start gate 41, a game state is generated per normal drawing, and the electric ball entry device 71 is opened. Further, in the present embodiment, substantially all the game balls that have entered the right route pass through the starting gate 41. As a result, among the game balls that have entered the right path, some of the game balls enter the electric ball entry device 71 after passing through the start gate 41, and the electric ball entry device 71 (role unit 70). It does not reach the second starting port 52 and the large winning opening 55 located on the downstream side of the above. Then, among the game balls that have entered the right path, some of the game balls that do not enter the electric ball entry device 71 are arranged on the downstream side of the electric ball entry device 71 (accessory unit 70) for the second start. It reaches the mouth 52 and the big winning mouth 55.
Therefore, during the occurrence of the "game state D", the game ball that has entered the right path is arranged on the downstream side of the electric ball entry device 71 (role unit 70) as compared with the "game state C". It becomes difficult to reach the second starting port 52 and the large winning opening 55.
As a result, during the occurrence of the "game state D", it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the electric ball entry device 71, and it becomes possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. , It becomes difficult to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery as compared with the "game state C", and even if the "small hit" is won by the second special symbol lottery, it is based on the small hit game state. It becomes difficult to win the prize ball.
Further, during the occurrence of the "game state D", the probability of winning the "big hit" by the second special symbol lottery is low (1/319 in the present embodiment). As a result, the possibility that a jackpot game state will occur is reduced.
As described above, during the occurrence of "Game State D", it is possible to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held, but to obtain more opportunities of the second special symbol lottery. It becomes difficult to do so, it is unlikely that a big hit game state will occur, and it will be difficult to win a prize ball based on the small hit game state. As a result, in order to shift to a more advantageous gaming state, we aim to win the "big hit"("big hit symbol 4" to "big hit symbol 6") by the second special symbol lottery ("high accuracy jackpot symbol"). The game will proceed (aiming to pull back). That is, the game ball is launched with respect to the right path with the aim of entering the game ball into the second starting port 52.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the "big hit 3" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the "game state D" (when the pullback of the "high accuracy jackpot symbol" fails). Usually, a "game state D" is generated in response to the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, when "Big hit 4" to "Big hit 6" are won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "Game state D" (when the "high accuracy big hit symbol" is successfully pulled back). Usually, "game state B" occurs in response to the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, when the number of time reductions is exhausted without winning "Big hit 3" to "Big hit 6" based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "Game state D"("High accuracy big hit symbol"). When the pullback of "is unsuccessful)," game state A "is generated according to the number of times of time reduction. That is, when the value of the first time reduction counter is updated to "0" based on the start determination executed during the occurrence of the "game state D", the variation display of the special symbol based on the start determination is started. Correspondingly, "gaming state A" is generated.
In this way, during the occurrence of "game state D", the game state is triggered by the fact that the "big hit"("big hit 3" to "big hit 6") is won or the number of time reductions is exhausted. Will migrate. At this time, if the "big hit 3" is won, the game shifts to the "game state D", and if the "big hit 4" to the "big hit 6" are won, the game shifts to the "game state B". On the other hand, when the number of time reductions is exhausted, the game shifts to "game state A". In particular, it is more advantageous for the player to shift to the "game state B" than to shift to the "game state D".

Here, when the "big hit 6" is won, the special high probability state is generated during the period from the end of the big hit game state to the occurrence of the next big hit game state. .. Further, when the "big hit 6" is won, a predetermined number of time reductions (the number of time reductions less than the probability variation number) is set. That is, when the "big hit 6" is won, 1 [time] is set as the number of time reductions.
As a result, when the "big hit 6" is won, the "game state B" is generated according to the end of the big hit game state, and then the "game" is generated according to the digestion of the time saving number (1 [times]). State C "occurs.
Specifically, when the "big hit 6" is won, the "game state B" is generated according to the end of the big hit game state, and then the stop display of the special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game state is displayed. When the number of times of time reduction reaches the set number of time reductions (1 [times]) (when the number of time reductions is exhausted), the "game state C" is generated accordingly.
That is, during the period from the end of the jackpot game state (“big hit 6”) to the set number of time reductions of the stop display of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game state, the “game state”. During the period from when "B" is generated and the number of times of stop display of the special symbol executed after the end of the jackpot game state reaches the set time reduction number until the next jackpot game state is started, "B" is generated. "Game state C" is generated.

The "game state B" is a game section for adding a prize ball (exit ball) based on the jackpot game state.
That is, as described above, the second starting port 52 is an entry port (fixed entry port) that opens upward, and a game ball can enter the ball at all times. As a result, it is possible to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery by inserting the game ball into the second starting port 52 during the occurrence of the "game state B".
In particular, in the second special symbol lottery, the high probability of transition is higher than in the first special symbol lottery. In addition, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the occurrence of the "game state B", the "long fluctuation time" (specifically, 590.0 [s]] is used as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. ) Is never selected.
Therefore, during the occurrence of the "game state B", in order to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery, the game ball is launched against the right route with the aim of entering the game ball into the second starting port 52. It will be.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the "gaming state B", the probability of winning the "normal symbol hit" by the ordinary symbol lottery is high (1 / 1.00001 in this embodiment). As a result, every time the game ball that has entered the right path passes through the start gate 41, a game state is generated per normal drawing, and the electric ball entry device 71 is opened. Further, in the present embodiment, substantially all the game balls that have entered the right route pass through the starting gate 41. As a result, among the game balls that have entered the right path, some of the game balls enter the electric ball entry device 71 after passing through the start gate 41, and the electric ball entry device 71 (role unit 70). It does not reach the second starting port 52 and the large winning opening 55 located on the downstream side of the above. Then, among the game balls that have entered the right path, some of the game balls that do not enter the electric ball entry device 71 are arranged on the downstream side of the electric ball entry device 71 (accessory unit 70) for the second start. It reaches the mouth 52 and the big winning mouth 55.
Therefore, during the occurrence of the "game state B", the game ball that has entered the right path is arranged on the downstream side of the electric ball entry device 71 (role unit 70) as compared with the "game state C". It becomes difficult to reach the second starting port 52 and the large winning opening 55.
As a result, during the occurrence of the "game state B", the game ball can be easily entered into the electric ball entry device 71, and the game can be advanced while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. , It becomes difficult to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery as compared with the "game state C", and even if the "small hit" is won by the second special symbol lottery, it is based on the small hit game state. It becomes difficult to win the prize ball.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the "game state B", the probability of winning the "big hit" by the second special symbol lottery is high (1/65 in the present embodiment). As a result, there is a high possibility that a jackpot game state will occur.
As a result, during the occurrence of "game state B", it is difficult to obtain a prize ball based on the small hit game state, but while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held, the opportunity for the second special symbol lottery is given. It can be acquired, and there is a high possibility that a big hit game state will occur. As a result, the game is advanced with the aim of acquiring the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery in order to acquire the prize ball based on the jackpot game state. That is, the game ball is launched with respect to the right path with the aim of entering the game ball into the second starting port 52.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the "big hit 3" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the "game state B" (when the pullback of the "high accuracy jackpot symbol" fails). Usually, a "game state D" is generated in response to the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, when "Big hit 4" to "Big hit 6" are won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "Game state B" (when the "high accuracy big hit symbol" is successfully pulled back). Usually, "game state B" occurs in response to the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, when the number of time reductions is exhausted without winning "Big hit 3" to "Big hit 6" based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "Game state B"("High accuracy big hit symbol"). When the pullback of "is unsuccessful)," game state C "is generated according to the number of times of time reduction. That is, when the value of the second time reduction counter is updated to "0" based on the stop display of the special symbol executed during the occurrence of "game state B", it corresponds to the end of the stop display of the special symbol. Then, "game state C" is generated.
In this way, during the occurrence of "game state B", the game state is triggered by the fact that the "big hit"("big hit 3" to "big hit 6") is won or the number of time reductions is exhausted. Will migrate. At this time, if the "big hit 3" is won, the game shifts to the "game state D", and if the "big hit 4" to the "big hit 6" are won, the game shifts to the "game state B". On the other hand, when the number of time reductions is exhausted, the state shifts to "game state C". In particular, it is more advantageous for the player to shift to the "game state B" than to shift to the "game state D". Further, it is more advantageous for the player to shift to the "game state C" than to shift to the "game state B".

The "game state C" is a game section for adding a prize ball (exit ball) based on the small hit game state.
That is, during the occurrence of the "game state C", the probability of winning the "normal symbol hit" by the ordinary symbol lottery is low (0/65536 in the present embodiment). As a result, even if the game ball that has entered the right path passes through the start gate 41, it is unlikely that a game state will occur per normal drawing, and it will be difficult for the game ball to enter the electric ball entry device 71. .. As a result, almost all the game balls that have entered the right path reach the second starting port 52 and the large winning opening 55 located on the downstream side of the electric ball entry device 71 (accessory unit 70).
Therefore, during the occurrence of the "game state C", it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 52, and the second special symbol lottery is based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 52. It will be possible to acquire the opportunity of. In addition, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the large winning opening 55 during the occurrence of the small hit game state.
In addition, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the occurrence of the "game state C", the "long fluctuation time" (specifically, 590.0 [s]] is used as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol. ) Is never selected. As a result, it becomes easy to obtain more opportunities for the second special symbol lottery (variable display of the second special symbol) in a short time.
Therefore, during the occurrence of the "game state C", the game ball is launched against the right route with the aim of entering the game ball into the second starting port 52 in order to obtain the opportunity of the second special symbol lottery. It will be.
Further, during the occurrence of the "game state C", the probability of winning the "big hit" by the second special symbol lottery is high (1/65 in the present embodiment). As a result, there is a high possibility that a jackpot game state will occur.
As described above, during the occurrence of the "game state C", it becomes easy to continuously generate the small hit game state in a short time, and as a result, the ball ejection rate is improved based on the small hit game state. It becomes easy. As a result, the game will proceed with the aim of acquiring more opportunities for the second special symbol lottery in order to generate more small hit game states.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the "big hit 3" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the "game state C" (when the pullback of the "high accuracy jackpot symbol" fails). Usually, a "game state D" is generated in response to the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, when "Big hit 4" to "Big hit 6" are won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of "Game state C" (when the "high accuracy big hit symbol" is successfully pulled back). Usually, "game state B" is generated in response to the end of the jackpot game state.
In this way, during the occurrence of the "game state C", the game state shifts when the "big hit"("big hit 3" to "big hit 6") is won. At this time, if the "big hit 3" is won, the game shifts to the "game state D", and if the "big hit 4" to the "big hit 6" are won, the game shifts to the "game state B". In particular, it is more advantageous for the player to shift to the "game state B" than to shift to the "game state D".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, as the number of transitions to the "game state C" increases, the number of prize balls acquired based on the jackpot game state increases, which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, among the four gaming states, during the occurrence of each of the other gaming states (“gaming state A”, “gaming state B”, or “gaming state D”) excluding “gaming state C”, the “gaming state” The game progresses with the aim of being promoted to "C".

(About various bonuses)
Next, various bonuses that can be obtained in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing the transition of the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state.
The "bonus" is a game section (or a prize ball that can be obtained in the game section) in which the base ratio is 100 [%] or more.
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to obtain a big hit bonus, a small hit bonus, an additional bonus, and the like as various bonuses.
The "big hit bonus" is the game section during the occurrence of the big hit game state (or the prize ball that can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the big prize opening 55 during the occurrence of the big hit game state). It has become.
In the present embodiment, 10 [balls] are defined as the upper limit of the number of balls that can be entered into the large winning opening 55 during the execution of each round game (hereinafter referred to as "upper limit number of balls"). .. In addition, 15 [balls] are specified as the number of prize balls to be paid out each time a game ball is detected in the large winning opening 55. Further, 4 [times] is defined as the number of round games to be executed when "big hit 1", "big hit 2", or "big hit 4" is won. On the other hand, 7 [times] is defined as the number of round games to be executed when the "big hit 3" or the "big hit 5" is won. On the other hand, 10 [times] is specified as the number of round games to be executed when the "big hit 6" is won.
As a result, if you win "Big hit 1", "Big hit 2" or "Big hit 4", as a big hit bonus, 600 [balls] (upper limit number of balls (10 [balls]) x number of prize balls (15 [balls]] ) × Number of round games (4 [times]) = 600 [balls]) It is possible to win prize balls.
On the other hand, if you win "Big hit 3" or "Big hit 5", as a big hit bonus, 1050 [balls] (upper limit number of balls (10 [balls]) x number of prize balls (15 [balls]) x number of round games (7 [times]) = 1050 [balls]) prize balls can be obtained.
On the other hand, if the "big hit 6" is won, the jackpot bonus is 1500 [balls] (upper limit number of balls (10 [balls]) x number of prize balls (15 [balls]) x number of round games (10 [times]]. ) = 1500 [balls]) prize balls can be obtained.

The "small hit bonus" can be obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 55 during the occurrence of the small hit game state (or during the occurrence of the small hit game state). It is a prize ball).
In the present embodiment, 8 [balls] is defined as the upper limit of the number of balls that can be entered into the large winning opening 55 during each small hit game (hereinafter referred to as "upper limit number of balls"). There is. In addition, 15 [balls] are specified as the number of prize balls to be paid out each time a game ball is detected in the large winning opening 55. Further, 1 [times] is defined as the number of small hit games to be executed when "small hit 1" to "big hit 3" are won.
As a result, if you win "small hit 1" to "big hit 3", the small hit bonus is 600 [balls] (upper limit number of balls (8 [balls]) x number of prize balls (15 [balls]) x small. It is possible to obtain a prize ball for the number of games (1 [times]) = 120 [balls]).

The "additional bonus" is a game section during a game in which the first open / close pattern is set as the open / close pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 71b (hereinafter referred to as "the first game state per normal figure"). Alternatively, it is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the electric ball entry device 71, the first non-electric ball entry device 72, and the second non-electric ball entry device 73 during the occurrence of the game state per the first normal figure. It is a prize ball that can be played).
The pachinko machine 1 is configured such that the base ratio during the occurrence of the gaming state per the first normal figure is 100 [%] or more. On the other hand, the base ratio during the occurrence of the game state per normal figure (hereinafter referred to as "game state per second normal figure") in which the second open / close pattern is set as the open / close pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 71b is 100 [%. ] Is configured to be less than. As a result, the game state per first normal figure is a bonus, but the game state per second normal figure is not a bonus.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (c), it is normal during the occurrence of the gaming state per the first normal figure (during the control of the normal figure electric accessory 71b based on the first opening / closing pattern). The unit opening in which the electric accessory 71b is in the 0.5 [s] open state is executed 10 [times], and after each unit opening, the normal electric accessory 71b is in the 4.2 [s] closed state. The closing period is set. Then, at the start of each unit opening, the distribution movable body 71c is displaced from the first state to the second state, and when 0.5 [s] elapses from the end of each unit opening, the distribution movable body 71c Is displaced from the second state to the first state.
As a result, during each unit opening, the game balls that have entered the electric ball entry device 71 are distributed to the second path r2 by the distribution movable body 71c, and each of the game balls distributed to the second path r2. Passage of the actuating gates g1 and g2 occurs, and the non-electric accessories 72b and 73b are displaced from the closed state to the open state accordingly.
In addition, during the closing period after each unit opening, the game ball that has entered the right path enters the non-electric ball entry devices 72 and 73 without entering the electric ball entry device 71, and each non-electric ball entry device 72 and 73. When the number of game balls that have entered the electric ball entry devices 72 and 73 reaches a predetermined number (hereinafter referred to as the "ball entry limit number"), the non-electric accessories 72b and 73b are opened accordingly. Is displaced to the closed state.
As described above, during the occurrence of the gaming state per the first normal figure, the non-electric ball entry devices 72 and 73 are opened according to the passage of the operating gates g1 and g2 by the game ball, and the non-electric ball entry devices 72. , 73 The number of game balls that have entered the ball reaches the maximum number of balls that can be entered, and the opening and closing operations of the non-electric ball entry devices 72 and 73 are repeated up to 10 [times]. It becomes possible.
In the present embodiment, 15 [balls] are defined as the number of prize balls to be paid out each time a game ball is detected in each of the non-electric ball entry devices 72 and 73. Further, 2 [balls] are specified as the maximum number of balls that can be entered by the non-electric ball entry devices 72 and 73.
As a result, when the gaming state per the first normal figure occurs, as an additional bonus, 600 [balls] (maximum number of balls (2 [balls]) x number of prize balls (15 [balls]) x number of units opened It is possible to win prize balls (10 [times]) x the number of non-electric ball entry devices 72 and 73 (2) = 600 [balls]).

In particular, in pachinko machine 1, among the winning types (“big hit 1” to “big hit 6”) that can be selected when the “big hit” is won, the big hit bonus (number of round games / number of prize balls that can be obtained) If you win the winning type (“big hit 6”) that has the largest number of hits, you can get an additional bonus in addition to the big hit bonus.
That is, if the "big hit 6" is won, it is possible to obtain 2100 [balls] (big hit bonus (1500 [balls]) + additional bonus (600 [balls] = 2100 [balls]) as a total bonus. ing.
It should be noted that, of the "big hit 1" to "big hit 6", other winning types excluding "big hit 6" may also be configured so that an additional bonus can be obtained in addition to the big hit bonus.

As described above, in order to obtain the additional bonus, it is necessary to generate the game state per the first normal figure.
Here, in the present embodiment, when the game state per normal figure is started during the low probability state of the normal figure, the first open / close pattern is set and started as the open / close pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 71b. The hit game state becomes the first normal figure hit game state. On the other hand, in the normal figure winning judgment executed during the normal figure low probability state, the probability of winning the "normal figure hit" is low (0/65536 in this embodiment), and a game state per normal figure occurs. It is difficult (impossible) to make it.
Then, in order to generate the first game state per normal figure, the probability state of the normal figure at the time of executing the winning judgment of the normal figure and the game state per game generated based on the winning judgment of the normal figure It is necessary to make it different from the normal probability state at the start.
Specifically, in order to generate the game state per first normal figure, the normal figure probability state at the time of executing the normal figure winning judgment is set to the normal figure high probability state, and it is generated based on the normal figure winning judgment. It is necessary to set the normal figure probability state at the start of the game state per normal figure to the normal figure low probability state.

For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to set 1 [time] as the number of time reductions when the "big hit 6" is won. Further, when the "big hit 6" is won, the high probability state (time reduction control) of the normal figure is terminated at the end of the stop display (stop time) of the special symbol. In addition, when the normal figure winning determination is executed during the normal figure high probability state (while the time reduction control is being executed), the second fluctuation time satisfying the above (Equation 1) is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. It has a structure. Further, the opening / closing pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 71b is set according to the probability state of the normal figure at the start of the game state per normal figure.
As a result, when the "big hit 6" is won, after the end of the big hit game state, the normal figure winning judgment is executed during the normal figure high probability state (while the time reduction control is being executed), and the normal figure winning judgment is made. During the variable display of the normal symbol based on, the stop display of the special symbol is generated, and the normal symbol probability state is changed from the normal symbol high probability state (during time reduction control) to the normal symbol according to the end of the stop display of the special symbol. It can be changed to the figure low probability state (while the time saving control is stopped), and as a result, the normal figure probability state at the start of the game state per normal figure based on the normal figure winning judgment is set as the normal figure low probability state. It becomes possible.
Therefore, when the "big hit 6" is won, after the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to generate the first normal figure hit game state through the variable display / stop display of the special symbol of 1 [times]. Will be. In other words, when the "big hit 6" is won, the game state has changed from "game state B" to "game state C" after the end of the big hit game state (time reduction control has been stopped). As an opportunity, it becomes possible to generate a game state per the first normal figure.
That is, when the "big hit 6" is won, it is possible to generate the first normal figure hit game state (additional bonus) only for 1 [times] after the end of the big hit game state.
The additional bonus will be described in detail below.

In the present embodiment, when the "big hit 6" is won and the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the big hit game state, the value of the first time reduction counter is set at the end of the big hit game state. A larger value (100 [times] in this embodiment) is set as compared with the predetermined number of time reductions (1 [times] in this embodiment), and the predetermined number of time reductions is set as the value of the second time reduction counter. (In this embodiment, 1 [times]) is set. Then, in response to the end of the jackpot game state, the normal high probability state (time reduction control) is started.
Further, the value of the first time saving counter is subtracted at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and the value of the second time saving counter is subtracted at the end of the stop display of the special symbol. Then, in response to the value of any of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter being updated to "0", the normal figure high probability state (time saving control) is terminated and the normal figure low. A stochastic state is created.

First, at the end of "Big hit 6", when the number of special figure 2 hold is "1" or more and the number of normal figure hold is "1" or more, an additional bonus is generated from the end of the big hit game state. The flow up to this point will be explained.
During the occurrence of the big hit game state, the game ball is launched against the right route with the aim of entering the game ball into the big winning opening 55. As a result, at the end of the jackpot game state, the number of reserved special figures 2 is usually "1" or more, and the number of reserved regular figures is "1" or more.
If the number of special figures 2 held is "1" or more at the end of "big hit 6", a start determination based on the held special figure 2 game information is executed according to the end of "big hit 6". , The variable display of the second special symbol is started. Here, in the present embodiment, "special variation" is selected as the variation mode for the variation display ("specific variation") of the special symbol based on the first start determination executed after the start of the "game state B". , A special fluctuation time (10.0 [s]) is set as the fluctuation time. Therefore, in the first start determination (hereinafter referred to as "first special figure game determination") executed after the end of "big hit 6", a special variation time (10.0 [s]) is set as the variation time. To.
Further, when the first special figure game determination is executed, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time reduction counter, but the value of the first time reduction counter after the subtraction is "1" or more. Therefore, when the first special figure game determination is executed (at the start of the variation display of the special symbol based on the first special figure game determination), the normal figure high probability state (time reduction control) is not ended.
On the other hand, if the number of reserved figures is "1" or more at the end of "big hit 6", 1.0 [s] (variation time related to the normal symbol in the variable display) at the latest after the end of "big hit 6". By the time (0.5 [s]) + stop time (0.5 [s]) = 1.0 [s]) related to the normal symbol elapses, the normal map based on the reserved game information The winning judgment is executed, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started. Here, in the present embodiment, in the high probability state of the normal figure (during the execution of the time saving control), the probability of winning the "winning of the normal figure" by the winning determination of the normal figure is high (1/1 in the present embodiment). .00001), and the second fluctuation time (21.0 [s]) is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the first normal figure winning judgment (hereinafter referred to as "first normal figure game judgment") executed after the end of "big hit 6", there is a high possibility that "normal figure hit" is judged. The second fluctuation time (21.0 [s]) is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol.

Then, at the end of "Big hit 6", if the number of special figure 2 hold is "1" or more and the number of normal figure hold is "1" or more, it is based on the first normal figure game judgment. The fluctuation time (21.0 [s]) of the normal symbol is the fluctuation / stop time (variation time (10.0 [s])) + stop time (0.5 [s]) of the special symbol based on the first special symbol game judgment. ) = 10.5 [s]).
As a result, the first normal figure game determination is executed during the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special figure game determination. That is, the first normal figure game determination is executed before the end of the stop display of the special symbol based on the first special figure game determination.
In addition, the stop display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol game determination ends before the end of the variable display of the normal symbol based on the first normal symbol game determination. That is, after the stop display of the special symbol based on the first special figure game determination is completed, the game state per normal figure based on the first normal figure game determination is started.
Then, at the end of the stop display of the special symbol based on the first special figure game determination, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time reduction counter, and the value of the second time reduction counter after the subtraction becomes "0". As a result, the normal figure high probability state (time reduction control) is terminated and the normal figure theorem probability state is generated in response to the end of the stop display of the special symbol based on the first special figure game determination.

As described above, when the first normal figure game judgment is executed, the normal figure high probability state (time saving control is being executed) is set, and when the normal figure per game state based on the first normal figure game judgment is started, the normal figure low probability state (time saving control is being executed) Is stopped).
As a result, it is possible to generate a game state (additional bonus) per first normal figure based on the first normal figure winning determination executed after the end of "big hit 6".

Next, at the end of the "big hit 6", when the special figure 2 hold number is "0" and the normal figure hold number is "0", an additional bonus is generated from the end of the big hit game state. The flow up to is explained.
If the number of special figure 2 hold = "0" and the number of normal figure hold = "0" at the end of "big hit 6", the first ball to be launched to the right route after the end of "big hit 6" With the passage of the starting gate 41 by the game ball (hereinafter referred to as the "first ball"), the fuzu game information is acquired, and the fuzu winning judgment (first fuzu) based on the acquired fuzu game information. Game judgment) is executed, and the variable display of the normal symbol is started. Here, as described above, in the first normal figure game determination, there is a high possibility that "per normal figure hit" is determined, and the second fluctuation time (21.0 [s]) is used as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Is set.
Then, the first game ball flows into the accessory unit 70 during the variable display of the normal symbol based on the first normal figure game determination. At this time, since the normal electric accessory 71b, the first non-electric accessory 72b, and the second non-electric accessory 73b are all in the closed state, the first game ball is the ball entry device 71- It passes through the accessory unit 70 without entering the 73. Here, in the present embodiment, substantially all the game balls that have passed through the accessory unit 70 (excluding the game balls that enter the large winning opening 55) are configured to enter the second starting opening 52. .. Therefore, the first game ball that has passed through the accessory unit 70 enters the second starting port 52.
Then, the special figure 2 game information is acquired according to the entry of the first ball into the second starting port 52, and the start determination (first special figure game determination) based on the acquired special figure 2 game information is made. It is executed and the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Here, as described above, in the first special figure game determination, the special fluctuation time (10.0 [s]) is set as the fluctuation time.
Further, when the first special figure game determination is executed, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time reduction counter, but the value of the first time reduction counter after the subtraction is "1" or more. Therefore, when the first special figure game determination is executed (at the start of the variation display of the special symbol based on the first special figure game determination), the normal figure high probability state (time reduction control) is not ended.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the second fluctuation time, "special fluctuation time (10.0 [s])", "stop time (0.5 [s])", and "one game ball is The theoretical longest time (10.0 [s]) required from passing through the starting gate 41 to entering the second starting port 52 ”and a time longer than the total time (21.0 [s]). s]) is specified.
Then, at the end of "Big hit 6", if the number of special figure 2 hold is "0" and the number of normal figure hold is "0", the normal symbol based on the first normal figure game judgment The fluctuation time (21.0 [s]) of is the time (1 ball) from the start of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol based on the first normal symbol game judgment to the end of the stop display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol game judgment. Maximum time (10.0 [s]) from when the eye game ball passes through the start gate 41 to when it enters the second start port 52 + variable time based on the first special figure game determination (10.0 [s]] ) + Stop time based on the first special figure game determination (0.5 [s]) = 20.5 [s]).
As a result, the first normal figure game determination is executed before the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special figure game determination. That is, the first normal figure game determination is executed before the end of the stop display of the special symbol based on the first special figure game determination.
In addition, the stop display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol game determination ends before the end of the variable display of the normal symbol based on the first normal symbol game determination. That is, after the stop display of the special symbol based on the first special figure game determination is completed, the game state per normal figure based on the first normal figure game determination is started.
Then, at the end of the stop display of the special symbol based on the first special figure game determination, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time reduction counter, and the value of the second time reduction counter after the subtraction becomes "0". As a result, the normal figure high probability state (time reduction control) is terminated and the normal figure theorem probability state is generated in response to the end of the stop display of the special symbol based on the first special figure game determination.

As described above, when the first normal figure game judgment is executed, the normal figure high probability state (time saving control is being executed) is set, and when the normal figure per game state based on the first normal figure game judgment is started, the normal figure low probability state (time saving control is being executed) Is stopped).
As a result, it is possible to generate a game state (additional bonus) per first normal figure based on the first normal figure winning determination executed after the end of "big hit 6".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "big hit 6" is won, it becomes easy (possible) to generate the first normal figure hit game state after the end of the big hit game state, and as a result, the big hit bonus In addition, it is possible to obtain an additional bonus.
On the other hand, if "Big hit 1" to "Big hit 5" are won, it becomes difficult (impossible) to cause the first normal figure hit game state after the end of the big hit game state, and as a result, only the big hit bonus is obtained. It becomes possible to do. Here, when "Big hit 1" to "Big hit 5" are won, it becomes easy (possible) to cause the second normal figure hit game state after the end of the big hit game state, and as a result, the number of balls held is reduced. It becomes possible to proceed with the game while suppressing it.
That is, as shown in FIG. 62, when the "big hit 6" is won, the "game state B" is generated according to the end of the big hit game state, and is executed during the occurrence of the "game state B". According to the end of the stop display of the first special symbol, the state shifts from "game state B" to "game state C". Then, with the transition to the "game state C", it becomes possible to generate the game state (additional bonus) per the first normal figure. Further, after the end of the first normal drawing game state, it is possible to improve the ball ejection rate based on the small hit game state.
On the other hand, when "Big hit 1" or "Big hit 3" is won, "Game state D" is generated according to the end of the big hit game state, and the special figure executed during the occurrence of "Game state D". When the number of hit determinations (starting determinations) reaches the time reduction number (100 [times]), the state shifts from "game state D" to "game state A". Then, during the occurrence of the "game state D", it becomes easy to generate the game state per the second normal figure, and the prize ball (entering the electric ball entry device 71) is entered based on the game state per the second normal figure. It becomes easy to obtain a prize ball paid out according to the ball), and as a result, it becomes possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held.
On the other hand, when the "big hit 2", the "big hit 4" or the "big hit 5" is won, the "gaming state B" is generated according to the end of the big hit gaming state. Then, during the occurrence of the "game state B", it becomes easy to generate the game state per the second normal figure, and the prize ball (entering the electric ball entry device 71) is entered based on the game state per the second normal figure. It becomes easy to obtain a prize ball paid out according to the ball), and as a result, it becomes possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held.
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, among the winning types (“big hit 1” to “big hit 6”) that can be selected when the “big hit” is won, the big hit bonus (number of round games / number of prize balls that can be obtained). ) Is the most winning type (“big hit 6”), the number of balls held by the player can be greatly increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(About control commands)
Next, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 and the control commands transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 will be described.
The main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, the communication between the main control board 200 and the effect control board 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300, and the communication from the effect control board 300 to the main control board 200 is performed. Not done.
Each control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 is composed of 1 byte of upper data indicating the type of control command and 1 byte of lower data indicating the content of the control command. There is.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command composed of upper data and lower data to the effect control board 300 by serial communication. When the effect control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the control command data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the effect control board 300 include a symbol type specification command, a variation mode specification command, a variation pattern specification command, a stop specification command, a game state specification command, and a number of holds. Specified command, opening specified command, round start specified command, round end specified command, ending specified command, V winning specified command, first look-ahead specified command, second look-ahead specified command, third look-ahead specified command, error specified command, demo specified Commands, setting value specification commands, etc. are set.
The symbol type specification command specifies the type of stop symbol (one of "missing symbol", "small hit symbol 1" to "small hit symbol 3", and "big hit symbol 1" to "big hit symbol 6"). Command to do. The symbol type specification command is transmitted at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. Here, the symbol type designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information).

The variable mode specification command is a command for specifying the variable mode type (variable mode number). The variable mode specification command specifies the variable time associated with the variable mode number by specifying the variable mode number. The variation mode specification command specifies the variation time of the first half period (the mode of the first half period of the variation effect) in the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, as the type of the fluctuation mode, m (plurality) types in which different fluctuation times are associated with each other are set. Then, the variable mode designation command specifies one of m types of variable modes (variable mode number) (“variable mode m”).
The variation pattern specification command is a command that specifies the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number). The variation pattern specification command specifies the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by specifying the variation pattern number. The variation pattern specification command specifies the variation time of the latter half period (the mode of the latter half period of the variation effect) in the variation display (variation effect) of the special symbol.
In the present embodiment, as the types of fluctuation patterns, n (plurality) types in which different fluctuation times are associated with each other are set. Then, the variation pattern specification command specifies one of n types of variation patterns (variation pattern number) (“variation pattern n”).
The variation mode specification command and the variation pattern specification command are transmitted at the start of the variation display of the special symbol.

The stop designation command is a command for designating a stop display of special symbols (effect symbols z1, z2). The stop specification command is sent at the start of the stop display of the special symbol. Here, the stop designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information).
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value).
Here, the "game state offset value" is information that specifies the game state. In the present embodiment, as the game state offset value, each combination of the time saving control flag value, the special figure high probability state flag value, the previous big hit symbol flag value, and the big hit after rotation speed counter value is used. The corresponding numerical value is set.
Then, the game state specification command specifies one game state offset value. The game state specification command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when the special game phase described later is changed, or the like.

The hold number specification command is a command for specifying the hold number. In the present embodiment, the hold number designation command specifies that the hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) has increased by "1", the hold number has decreased by "1", the hold number, etc. ..
Here, the "special figure 1 hold number" means the number of hold of the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the first special symbol in the special figure 1 display device. Further, the "special figure 2 hold number" means the number of hold of the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the second special symbol in the special figure 2 display device.
The hold number designation command is transmitted at the time of turning on the power, storing the game information, starting the variable display of the special symbol, and the like. Here, the hold number designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information).

The opening designation command is a command for designating the start of the opening period (start of the small hit game state or the big hit game state). The opening designation command is the type of the small hit game state or the big hit game state to start (the type of the stop symbol (specifically, "small hit symbol 1" to "small hit symbol 3" and "big hit symbol 1" to "big hit". Of "Design 6", one type)) is specified. The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of the small hit game state or the big hit game state).
The round start designation command is a command for designating the start of a small hit game or a round game. The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of a small hit game or a round game.
The round end designation command is a command for designating the end of a small hit game or a round game. The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of the small hit game or the round game.
The ending specification command is a command that specifies the start of the ending period. The ending specification command is sent at the beginning of the ending period.
The V prize designation command is a command for designating the detection of the passage of the V region by the game ball. The V winning designation command is transmitted when the game ball detects the passage of the V region.

The first look-ahead designation command sets the type of stop symbol (one of "missing symbol", "small hit symbol 1" to "small hit symbol 3", and "big hit symbol 1" to "big hit symbol 6"). This is the command to specify. Here, the first look-ahead designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information).
The second look-ahead designation command is a command that specifies the contents of the variable mode. Specifically, the second look-ahead specification command has an indefinite type of variable mode (“undefined value”), or one of m types of variable modes (variable mode number) (“variable mode m”). ) Is specified. The second look-ahead designation command is transmitted when the game information is stored.
The third look-ahead designation command is a command for designating the content of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the third look-ahead designation command has an indefinite type of variation pattern (“indefinite value”), or one of n types of variation patterns (variation pattern number) (“variation pattern n”). ) Is specified. The third look-ahead designation command is transmitted when the game information is stored.

The error specification command is a command that specifies the occurrence of various errors. In the present embodiment, the error specification command specifies the occurrence of a vibration error, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, or a right-handed error. The error specification command is sent when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demo specification command is a command that specifies the start of the customer waiting state. The demo specification command is sent at the start of the customer waiting state.
The setting value specification command is a command for specifying a setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230. The setting value specification command is transmitted when the RAM is cleared, when the power is restored after the power is turned on, when the setting change state ends, when the setting confirmation state ends, and so on.

The main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is performed in both directions. Each control command transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is composed of 1 byte of data.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command to the payout control board 400 by serial communication. When the payout control board 400 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the control command data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM by this interrupt processing. Further, the payout control board 400 transmits a control command to the main control board 200 by serial communication. When the main control board 200 receives a control command from the payout control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt is generated, and the control command data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230 by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, a prize ball number designation command or the like is set as a control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400.
The prize ball number designation command is a command for designating the number of prize balls to be paid out. In the present embodiment, the prize ball number designation command specifies the payout of n (n = 1 to 15) prize balls. The prize ball number designation command is transmitted when the prize ball payout operation is executed by the payout control board 400.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as control commands transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200, a payout error occurs / cancels, a full tank error occurs / cancels, a ball jam error occurs / cancels, and the like. Control commands that specify each are set. Each control command is sent when the occurrence / cancellation of various errors is detected.

(Processing executed on the main control board 200)
Next, the process executed by the main control board 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured on the main control board 200 will be described.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the random number generation circuit 203 starts the hard random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, the values of the first loop counter to the third loop counter are within a predetermined range every time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 0.083 [μs] in this embodiment). (In the present embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) is updated by "1".
Further, in the hard random number update process, the value of the fourth loop counter is within a predetermined range every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (every 2.666 [μs] in this embodiment). In the embodiment, it is updated by "1" in the range of 0 to 10066).
Then, the hard random number update process updates the winning random number of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the second special symbol lottery, and the reach group random number, respectively. The hard random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generation circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on the software.

Further, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 transmit the control commands stored in the FIFO buffer to the effect control board 300 or the payout control board 400. The control command transmission process is started. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 described later based on the software.

Next, the game control process executed by the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 based on the program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
(CPU initialization process)
First, the CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the CPU initialization process.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in FIG. The CPU initialization process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the CPU initialization process is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the CPU initialization process is started, the process first proceeds to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, the initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, the startup program is read from the ROM 220, and the settings necessary for executing various processes such as register settings are performed.
Further, in the initial setting process, the RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, the detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and the detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 are read.

Specifically, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read 2 [times], and the RAM clear switch 207 is turned on based on the read result of 2 [times]. Is determined whether or not is occurring. Then, the determination result is saved as the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, when it is determined that the on state has occurred, a value indicating that the on state has occurred (“1” in the present embodiment) is saved as the switch information, and the on state occurs. If it is determined that the switch information is not set, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred (“0” in the present embodiment) is saved as the switch information.

Further, the reading of the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is executed 2 [times], and the on state is generated for the setting key switch 208 based on the reading result of 2 [times]. Determine if it is. Then, the determination result is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. At this time, when it is determined that the on state has occurred, a value indicating that the on state has occurred (“1” in the present embodiment) is saved as the switch information, and the on state occurs. If it is determined that the switch information is not set, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred (“0” in the present embodiment) is saved as the switch information.

Further, the reading of the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the inner frame opening sensor 108 is executed 2 [times], and the inner frame opening sensor 108 is turned on based on the reading result of 2 [times]. Is determined whether or not is occurring. Then, when it is determined that the on state has not occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value (“0” in the present embodiment) indicating that the on state has not occurred. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state has occurred, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, the wait processing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 [s] in this embodiment) is set in the timer counter. As a result, the measurement of the wait processing time set by the timer counter is started.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether or not the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed, and if it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4. If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the processing of steps S1-3 is repeated.
In step S1-4, the RAM access permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, processing necessary for permitting access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to the access permission is stored as the RAM protect value in the RAM access protect area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is permitted.

In step S1-5, the game machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the game machine state flag acquisition process, the game machine state flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the game machine state flag acquisition process, the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is stored (loaded) in the D register.
In step S1-6, it is determined whether or not the backup valid flag is normal, and if it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-7, and the backup valid flag is normal. If it is determined that this is not the case (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, when the value stored in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230 (backup valid flag) is a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal, and the value stored in the backup valid flag area. If is not a predetermined valid value, it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal.

In step S1-7, the checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, the checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 among the backup information.
Next, among the backup information, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal, and if it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-9. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to steps S1-18.
Here, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1". When both the conditions of "the checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in -7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area" are satisfied. Determine that the checksum is normal.
On the other hand, "the checksum value of the used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of the used area M1 stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230" and "step S1- At least one of the conditions of "the checksum value of the unused area M2 calculated in 7 matches the checksum value of the unused area M2 stored in the checksum area" is satisfied. If not, it is determined that the checksum is not normal.

In step S1-9, the clear target area setting process at power-on is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-10. In the power-on clear target area setting process, as a range for clearing (initializing) the used area M1 of the RAM 230, other areas excluding the set value area and the game machine state flag area (specifically, the checksum area, The backup valid flag area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area) are set.
In step S1-10, it is determined whether or not the ON state has occurred for the RAM clear switch 207, and if it is determined that the ON state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-11. If it is determined that the ON state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is in the ON state. At this time, if the value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the on state has occurred, and the value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved. If so, it is determined that the on state has not occurred.

In step S1-11, it is determined whether or not the playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the gameable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-12 and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to steps S1-14.
Here, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred based on the game machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the game machine state flag stored in the D register has a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, it is determined that the game-enabled state has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to the game-enabled state, the game is played. Judge that the possible state has not occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-13, and the setting confirmation condition is set. If it is determined that this is not the case (No), the process proceeds to steps S1-14.
The "setting confirmation condition" is that the playable state has occurred, the RAM clear switch 207 has not been turned on, and the setting key switch 208 has been turned on. This is established when the frame opening sensor 108 is in the ON state.
Here, in step S1-1, when the on state has not occurred for the inner frame opening sensor 108, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the on state has not occurred. As a result, when the on state has occurred for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame opening sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. .. On the other hand, when the on state has not occurred for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame opening sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. Will be done.
Therefore, in step 1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if the value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and the value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved. If it is, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-13, the setting confirmation state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the setting confirmation status setting process, a value corresponding to the set value confirmation status is set as the game machine status flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, the clear target area setting process is executed when the power is restored, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the clear target area setting process when the power is restored, the set value area, the game machine state flag area, the normal game-related area 2, and other areas other than the stack area are excluded as the range for clearing (initializing) the used area M1 of the RAM 230. Areas (specifically, a checksum area, a backup valid flag area, an error-related area, and a normal game-related area 1) are set.

In step S1-15, the initialization process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. The initialization process when the power is restored will be described later.
In step S1-16, the subcommand transmission process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the subcommand transmission process when the power is restored, the subcommand that specifies that the power has been restored is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-17, the payout command transmission process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process when the power is restored, the payout command that specifies that the power has been restored from the power cutoff is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-18, the backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as the game machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, the unused area read / write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the unused area read / write check process, the unused area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read / write check is performed.
In step S1-20, the abnormal clear target area setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-21. In the abnormal clear target area setting process, all areas (specifically, set value area, game machine state flag area, checksum area, backup valid flag) are defined as the range for clearing (initializing) the used area M1 of the RAM 230. Area, error-related area, normal game-related area 1, normal game-related area 2, and stack area) are set.

In step S1-21, the used area read / write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-22. In the used area read / write check process, the range set in steps S1-20 of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and the read / write check is performed.
Specifically, in the used area read / write check process, all the areas (specifically, the set value area, the game machine state flag area, the checksum area, the backup effective flag area, and the error-related area) of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 are used. Clear (initialize) the area, the normal game-related area 1, the normal game-related area 2, and the stack area).
As a result, a predetermined initial value is set as the value of each of the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the special figure 2 display symbol counter, and the normal symbol display symbol counter. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to the “missing symbol” is set as a predetermined initial value. That is, the value corresponding to the "missing symbol" corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set as the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter, and the value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set as the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter. A value corresponding to the "missing symbol" is set, and a value corresponding to the "missing symbol" corresponding to the normal symbol lottery is set as the value of the normal symbol display symbol counter.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether or not the result of the read / write check performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 is normal, and when it is determined that the result of the read / write check is not normal (No). , Step S1-23, and if it is determined that the read / write check result is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-24.
In step S1-23, the RAM abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as the game machine state flag in the D register.
In steps S1-24, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to steps S1-25 and the setting is performed. If it is determined that the confirmation state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to steps S1-26.
Here, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred based on the game machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the game machine status flag saved in the D register has a value corresponding to the setting confirmation status, it is determined that the setting confirmation status has occurred, and if the value does not correspond to the setting confirmation status, the setting is made. It is determined that the confirmation state has not occurred.
In step S1-25, the game enable state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-26. In the game-enabled state setting process, a value corresponding to the game-enabled state is set as the game machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the setting change condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-27, and the setting change condition is set. If it is determined that the condition is not established (No), the process proceeds to steps S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is that the RAM clear switch 207 is in the ON state, the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is in the ON state. It holds in the case.
Here, as described above, when both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame opening sensor 108 are in the ON state, it is indicated that the ON state is generated as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. The value is saved. On the other hand, when the on state has not occurred for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame opening sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. Will be done.
Therefore, in step 1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. ..
At this time, if the value indicating that the ON state has occurred is saved for both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, the setting change condition is satisfied. Is determined. On the other hand, when at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 has a value indicating that the on state has not occurred, the setting change condition is satisfied. Judge that it is not.

In step S1-27, the setting change state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as the game machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-28, the game machine state flag saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-29. In the game machine state flag saving process, the game machine state flag set in the D register is saved (saved) in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S1-29, the subcommand transmission process at the time of clearing the RAM is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-30. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, the subcommand that specifies that the RAM clear has been executed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-30, the initialization process at the time of clearing the RAM is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-31. In the RAM clearing initialization process, the RAM 230 is initially set. In the RAM clearing initialization process, the range set in step S1-9 in the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
Specifically, in the RAM clearing initialization process, of the used area M1 of the RAM 230, other areas (specifically, the checksum area, the backup effective flag area, etc.) excluding the set value area and the game machine state flag area. Clear (initialize) the error-related area, the normal game-related area 1, the normal game-related area 2, and the stack area).
As a result, a predetermined initial value is set as the value of each of the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the special figure 2 display symbol counter, and the normal symbol display symbol counter. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to the “missing symbol” is set as a predetermined initial value. That is, the value corresponding to the "missing symbol" corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set as the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter, and the value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set as the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter. A value corresponding to the "missing symbol" is set, and a value corresponding to the "missing symbol" corresponding to the normal symbol lottery is set as the value of the normal symbol display symbol counter.
In step S1-31, the RAM clearing issue command transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the RAM clearing payout command transmission process, the payout command specifying that the RAM clearing has been executed is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-32, the subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-33. In the subcommand setting process, the power-on game machine state specification command for specifying the current game machine state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Specifically, in the subcommand setting process, a subcommand output request for the RAM 230 is used to issue a power-on game machine state specification command that specifies the game machine state flag (game machine state) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. Store in the buffer.
In step S1-33, the subcommand group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-34. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, in the subcommand group, a subcommand for specifying the power recovery phase, a subcommand for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand for specifying the firing position, and a stop symbol for the first special symbol are specified. Subcommand to be executed, a subcommand to specify the stop symbol of the second special symbol, a subcommand to specify the number of special figure 1 hold, a subcommand to specify the number of hold of special figure 2, a subcommand to specify the value of the time reduction counter, RAM230 Contains subcommands that specify the setting values stored in the setting value area of.

In step S1-34, the initial display time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in the initial display timer.
In step S1-35, the interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1). In the interrupt setting process, the CTC (counter / timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initially set.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, the interrupt vector register is set, and the interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(Initialization process when power is restored)
Next, the initialization process at the time of power recovery executed in steps S1-15 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the initialization process when the power is restored.
When the power restoration initialization process is executed in steps S1-15, the process first proceeds to step S28-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S28-1, the initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-3. In the initialization process, the range set in steps S1-14 of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized).
Specifically, in the initialization process, of the used area M1 of the RAM 230, other areas (specifically, a check) excluding the set value area, the game machine state flag area, the normal game-related area 2, and the stack area. Clear (initialize) the thumb area, backup valid flag area, error-related area, and normal game-related area 1).
Here, in the initialization process, the normal game-related area 2 is not cleared (initialized). Therefore, the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter, and the value of the normal figure display symbol counter are not cleared (initialized).

In step S28-2, it is determined whether or not the symbol initialization condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the symbol initialization condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-3, and the symbol initialization condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied (No), a series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S1-16).
In the present embodiment, as a symbol initialization condition, "a state in which the game is not being executed (a state in which the game is stopped)" is defined.
Specifically, as a symbol initialization condition, "a state in which the special game is not executed (a state in which the special game is stopped) and a state in which the normal game is not executed (the normal game is stopped)". State) "is stipulated.
Here, the "state in which the special game is not executed" means that (1) the special figure 1 display device is not in the variable display (during the variable time) or the stop display (during the stop time) of the first special symbol. , (2) The special figure 2 display device is not in the variable display (during the variable time) or the stop display (during the stop time) of the second special symbol, and (3) the number of special figures 1 held = "0". That, (4) the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 = "0", and (5) the small hit game state or the big hit game state is not occurring, which means that all the conditions are satisfied.
The "state in which the normal game is not executed" means that (1) the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (during the variable time) or stopped (during the stop time) in the normal symbol display device, and (2) the normal symbol is not being displayed. It means a state in which all the conditions of the number of holds = "0" and (3) that the game state is not occurring per normal figure are satisfied.

Specifically, in step S28-2, (1) a value corresponding to the “special figure 1 fluctuation waiting state” is set in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area described later, and (2) the special figure 1 described later. FIG. 2 In the special game phase flag area, a value corresponding to the "special figure 2 fluctuation waiting state" is set, and (3) in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, which will be described later, the "special electric accessory non-operating state" The value corresponding to "" is set, (4) the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter described later = "0", and (5) the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter described later = "0". (6) In the normal game phase flag area of the normal figure described later, a value corresponding to the "waiting state for fluctuation of the normal figure" is set, and (7) in the game phase flag area at the time of winning the normal figure described later. , When all the conditions are satisfied that the value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory non-operating state" is set, and (8) the value of the normal figure hold number counter described later is "0". , It is determined that the symbol initialization condition is satisfied.
On the other hand, if at least one of the above conditions (1) to (8) is not satisfied, it is determined that the symbol initialization condition is not satisfied.

In step S28-3, the symbol initialization process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S1-16). In the symbol initialization process, the values of the counters of the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the special figure 2 display symbol counter, and the normal symbol display symbol counter are cleared (initialized).
Specifically, in the symbol initialization process, a predetermined initial value is set as the value of each counter for the special figure 1 display symbol counter, the special figure 2 display symbol counter, and the normal symbol display symbol counter. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to the “missing symbol” is set as a predetermined initial value. That is, the value corresponding to the "missing symbol" corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set as the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter, and the value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set as the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter. A value corresponding to the "missing symbol" is set, and a value corresponding to the "missing symbol" corresponding to the normal symbol lottery is set as the value of the normal symbol display symbol counter.

(Main loop processing)
Next, the main loop process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the main loop processing.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-35) shown in FIG. 10 is completed, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in FIG. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the main loop processing is started, first, the process proceeds to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt disable state that prohibits interrupts of other processes is set. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of the power-off save time processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, the initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
Here, the "initial value random number" is a random number for determining the initial value and the end value of soft random numbers (hit symbol random numbers, reach mode random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc.) that are random numbers generated on the program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within the range from the preset initial value to the end value. Then, the initial value and the end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed every time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and the end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, the main command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command (control command transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200) received from the payout control board 400 is analyzed, and the process according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, the subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of the output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the subcommand input to the transmission data register is stored (stored) in the FIFO buffer. Then, the subcommands stored in the FIFO buffer are transmitted to the effect control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, interrupt enable processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt enable processing, the interrupt disable state is canceled. As a result, execution of power-off save processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. is permitted during the period from the execution of the interrupt permission processing in step S2-5 to the execution of the interrupt prohibition processing in step S2-1. This is the interrupt enable period.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update process, the soft random numbers excluding the hit symbol random numbers (specifically, reach mode random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Evacuation processing when power is cut off)
Next, the evacuation process when the power is cut off, which is executed by the CPU 210, will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the evacuation process when the power is cut off.
The main control board 200 includes a power supply cutoff detection circuit (not shown). The power cutoff detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 600, and outputs a power supply cutoff warning signal to the input port 204 when the value of the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
When the CPU 210 receives the power cutoff warning signal, it starts the power cutoff save process shown in FIG. 13 during the interrupt enable period of the main loop process. The evacuation process when the power is cut off is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the evacuation process when the power is cut off is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the power-off time evacuation process is started, the process first proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register save process, the value of the register used during execution of the main loop process is saved in the save area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, the power cutoff warning signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-3, is the power cutoff warning signal input from the power cutoff detection circuit based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal)? When it is determined whether or not the power cutoff warning signal is input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and when it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal is not input (No). Goes to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, the output port stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop processing, the output of the control signal and the control command by the output port 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) is stopped.
Specifically, in the output port stop processing, the values of all the bits included in the port registers of the output port 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) are initialized. As a result, the output of the control signal and the control command by the output port 205 (output port 0 to output port 4) is stopped.
In step S3-5, the backup enable flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is saved in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S3-6, the checksum saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the checksum save process, the checksum is calculated and saved.
Specifically, in the checksum storage process, first, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 230.
Next, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the unused area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230. Then, the calculated checksum value is saved in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, the RAM access prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to the access prohibition is stored as the RAM protect value in the RAM access protect area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-8, the loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times of reading the power cutoff warning signal is set as the value of the loop counter for return determination.
In step S3-9, the power cutoff warning signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value (“1” or “0”) set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal of the input port 204 is read.
In step S3-10, is the power cutoff warning signal input from the power cutoff detection circuit based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the power cutoff notice signal)? When it is determined whether or not the power cutoff warning signal is input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and when it is determined that the power cutoff notice signal is input (Yes). Goes to step S3-8.

In step S3-11, the loop counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12. In the loop counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether or not the value of the return determination loop counter is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is "0" (Yes), the CPU When the process proceeds to the initialization process (step S1-1) and it is determined that the value of the return determination loop counter is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, the register return processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the original processing is restored. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S3-1 is restored. Then, after the register return processing is completed, the process returns to the main loop processing (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Timer interrupt processing)
Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing.
The clock generation circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal every predetermined interrupt cycle (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment).
The CPU 210 starts the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 14 during the interrupt enable period of the main loop process in response to the generation of the interrupt request signal. The main loop process is a process based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. That is, the main loop process is a process based on the program stored in the used area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the timer interrupt process is started, the process first proceeds to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all the registers used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in the save area of the RAM 230.
In step S4-2, interrupt enable processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt enable process, interrupts are allowed.

In step S4-3, the dynamic port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4. The dynamic port output processing will be described later.
In step S4-4, the port input process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. In the port input process, the status of each switch / sensor is acquired.
The RAM 230 is provided with an on-state storage area corresponding to each switch sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3).
In the port input process, it is determined whether or not each switch sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3) is in the ON state. Here, the "on state" means a state in which the detection signal is not input (low level) to a state in which the detection signal is input (high level). At this time, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the switch sensor has occurred based on the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch sensor.
Then, when it is determined that the on state has occurred for each switch sensor, "1" is set in the on state storage area corresponding to the switch sensor. On the other hand, when it is determined that the on state has not occurred for each switch sensor, "0" is set in the on state storage area corresponding to the switch sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the on-state storage area corresponding to each switch sensor is referred to as “switch bit data” of the switch sensor.

In step S4-5, the game machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the game machine state flag acquisition process, the game machine state flag stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether or not the game-enabled state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the game-enabled state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-7 and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-9.
Here, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred based on the game machine state flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired game machine state flag has a value corresponding to the gameable state, it is determined that the gameable state has occurred, and if it is not a value corresponding to the gameable state, the gameable state is generated. Judge that it is not.

In step S4-7, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that no abnormal state has occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-8, and the abnormal state is changed. If it is determined that it has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-19.
Here, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred based on the game machine state flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired game machine status flag is a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that the abnormal state has occurred. If the acquired game machine status flag is not a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal status, the RAM abnormal status, and the backup abnormal status, it is determined that the abnormal status has not occurred.

In step S4-8, the setting-related process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. The setting-related processing will be described later.
In step S4-9, the timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, in the timer update process, the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.) are updated.
In step S4-10, the initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. The initial value random number update process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-11, the hit symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the hit symbol random number update process, the value of the loop counter for generating the hit symbol random number among the soft random numbers is updated.
In step S4-12, the switch management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the switch management process, processing (acquisition of various random numbers, etc.) according to the state (whether or not the on state is detected) of each switch 101, 102, 104, 110 is executed. The switch management process will be described later.

In step S4-13, the special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device and special figure 2 display device), the operation of the special electric accessory 55a, and the like are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-14, the normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. In the normal game management process, the operation of the normal figure display device, the operation of the normal electric accessory 71b, and the like are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.
In step S4-15, the state management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the state management process, various errors (abnormal states) are determined and settings are made according to the determination results.
In step S4-16, the winning opening switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the winning opening switch processing, processing (update of various counters, etc.) according to the state of each switch 101-103, 105, 106, 111, 112 (whether or not the ON state is detected) is executed.

In step S4-17, the payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
In the present embodiment, as the prize ball control counter, the prize ball control counter 1 that stores the number of ball game balls that have entered the large winning opening 55 and the number of ball game balls that have entered the non-electric ball entry devices 72 and 73. The prize ball control counter 2 in which is stored, the prize ball control counter 3 in which the number of ball game balls entered in the left other winning openings 57a to 57c is stored, and the number of ball game balls entered in the electric ball entry device 71. The prize ball control counter 4 in which is stored, the prize ball control counter 5 in which the number of ball game balls entered in the first starting port 51 is stored, and the number of ball game balls entered in the second starting port 52 are stored. The prize ball control counter 6 is set.

Then, in the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (15 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, when the payout control board 400 completes the payout of the prize ball by the game ball payout device 440, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command for designating the completion of the payout to the main control board 200. Then, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (15 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, when the payout control board 400 completes the payout of the prize balls by the game ball payout device 440, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command for designating the completion of the payout to the main control board 200. Then, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (4 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (1 [ball] in the present embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (4 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the prize ball control counter 6 is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 6 is "1" or more, a payout command for specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (1 [ball] in this embodiment) is generated. The generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command for designating the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 6 in response to the reception of the main command that specifies the completion of the payout.

In step S4-18, the launch position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the launch position designation management process, the process related to the designation of the launch position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when changing from a state in which the launch of the game ball to the left route is specified to a state in which the launch of the game ball to the right route is specified (at the start of the jackpot game state, etc.). , "1" is set in the firing position designation flag area of the RAM 230, and the subcommand for designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a subcommand for designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is transmitted to the effect control board 300.
On the other hand, when changing from the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the right route to the state of specifying the launch of the game ball to the left route (at the end of the time reduction control, etc.), the launch position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is set to " Set "0".
In the present embodiment, “0” is set in the launch position designation flag area during the occurrence of “game state A”, and information for designating the left route is displayed as the route for launching the game ball in the right-handed display device. Will be done.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of "game state B", "game state C" or "game state D", "1" is set in the launch position designation flag area, and the right-handed display device sets the path for launching the game ball. , The information to specify the right route is displayed.

In step S4-19, the external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In the present embodiment, as external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (electronic device such as a hall computer or a data display device), symbol confirmation count information, start port information, jackpot information, security information, and out port Information on the number of payouts, information on the occurrence of errors, etc. are specified.
The "design fixed number of times information" is external information regarding the number of times the special symbol lottery (variation display and stop display of the special symbol) is executed. The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the symbol confirmation count information to the hall computer (or data display device) every time the number of executions of the stop display of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number.
The "starting port information" is external information regarding the entry of the game ball into the starting ports 51 and 52. Each time the ON state of the detection signal input from the start port switches 101 and 102 is detected, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the start port information to the hall computer (or data display device).

The "big hit information" is external information regarding the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. The main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer (or data display device) each time a jackpot gaming state occurs.
The "out port payout information" is external information regarding the number of game balls discharged from the discharge path (or the number of game balls discharged from the out port 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the out-port payout number information to the hall computer every time the value of the out-ball number counter for external information reaches a predetermined value.
The "security information" is external information indicating that the setting change state is occurring, the setting confirmation state is occurring, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. When the value of the security timer is "1" or more, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hall computer.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the fixed number counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the confirmation count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the symbol confirmation count information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the fixed number counter for external information. As a result, the symbol confirmation count information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information start port entry count counter has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the start port entry count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the start port information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the start port entry count counter for external information. As a result, the starting port information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (1 [times] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the jackpot count counter for external information. As a result, the jackpot information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the external information out-ball number counter has reached a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the out ball number counter for external information has reached a predetermined value, the out port payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. After that, a predetermined value (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is subtracted from the value of the out-ball number counter for external information. As a result, the out-port payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the game available state.
Then, it is determined that the value stored in the game machine state flag area is not a value corresponding to the game-enabled state (setting change state, setting confirmation state, setting abnormality state, RAM abnormality state, or backup abnormality state). If it is determined to be a value), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Further, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value of the security timer is "1" or more. Then, when it is determined that the value of the security timer is "1" or more, the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In step S4-20, the LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits). Has been done.
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized) and the common 3 output request buffer is cleared (initialized). Specifically, "0" is set for each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer, and "0" is set for each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer.
Next, the game machine state flag stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Then, when the acquired game machine state flag is a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, the normal display data setting process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the acquired game machine status flag is a value corresponding to the setting change status, the display data setting process at the time of setting change, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when the acquired game machine status flag is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation status, the display data setting process at the time of setting confirmation, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, when the acquired game machine status flag is a value corresponding to an abnormal status (setting abnormal status, RAM abnormal status, or backup abnormal status), the abnormal time display data setting process described later is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the acquired value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is stored in the common 0 output request buffer. Set.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the first special symbol is displayed by the LEDs 1 to LED8.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the acquired value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the second special symbol is displayed by the LEDs 9 to 16.
Next, the value of the general symbol display symbol counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value of the general symbol display symbol counter is set as the output data a.
Next, the values set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning of the RAM 230 are "state before opening of the big winning opening at the time of big hit", "control state of opening the big winning opening at the time of big hit", and "effective closing of the big winning opening at the time of big hit". "State", "Large hit big winning opening end wait state", "Small hit big winning opening opening state", "Small hit big winning opening open control state", "Small hit big winning opening closed effective state" And, among the "small hit large winning opening opening end wait state", it is determined whether or not it is a value that specifies any of the special game phases.
Then, the values set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning are "state before opening of the big winning opening at the time of big hit", "control state of opening the big winning opening at the time of big hit", "valid state of closing the big winning opening at the time of big hit", "Large hit big winning opening end wait state", "Small hit big winning opening opening state", "Small hit big winning opening open control state", "Small hit big winning opening closed effective state" and "Small hit When it is determined that any of the special game phases is specified in the "hit time big winning opening opening end wait state", the value set in the special symbol judgment flag area of the RAM 230 (corresponding to the type of big hit symbol). The value to be used) is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data b.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning is a value that specifies the "special electric accessory non-operating state", the output data b is not set.
Next, the value set in the firing position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data c.
Next, the display data (8 bits) that is the logical sum of the output data a to the output data c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the ordinary symbols are displayed by the LEDs 17 and 18, and the number of round games executed by the LEDs 19 to 23 during the big hit game state or the small hit game state ( The type of the big hit game state or the type of the small hit game state) is displayed, and the LED 24 displays the route (left side route or right side route) at which the game ball should be launched.
Next, the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data d.
Next, the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data e.
Next, the value of the normal figure hold number counter is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data f.
Next, it is determined whether or not the power is restored.
Then, when it is determined that the power is restored, the value set in the special figure high probability state flag area is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data g.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the power is not restored, the output data g is not set.
Next, the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as the output data h.
Next, the display data (8 bits) that is the logical sum of the output data d to the output data h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the main display device 60, the special figure 1 hold number is displayed by the LEDs 25 and 26, the special figure 2 hold number is displayed by the LEDs 27 and 28, and the special figure 2 hold number is displayed by the LEDs 29 and 30. The number of holds is displayed, the game state at the time of power recovery (during the occurrence of the special figure high probability state or the occurrence of the special figure low probability state) is displayed by the LED 31, and the current game state (execution of the time saving control) by the LED 32. Medium or stopped) is displayed.

In the setting change display data setting process, the information indicating that the setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and is stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230. The information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." Is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and "-" The display data (8 bits) of is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the characters "r" are displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the characters "n." Are displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and the characters "n." Are displayed by the LEDs 49 to LED56. The characters "-" are displayed, and the numbers indicating the set values are displayed by the LEDs 57 to 64.

In the setting confirmation display data setting process, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and is stored in the set value area of the RAM 230. The information indicating the value is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." Is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the RAM 230 is set. The display data corresponding to the set value stored in the value area is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (the clear value remains).
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the characters "r" are displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the characters "n." Are displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and the characters "n." Are displayed by the LEDs 57 to LED64. A number indicating the value is displayed. The LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In the abnormal display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer. At the same time, the error code corresponding to the generated abnormality is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "E" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "r." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and an abnormality occurs. The display data (error code) corresponding to the status (setting abnormal status, RAM abnormal status, or backup abnormal status) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. No display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (the clear value remains).
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the letters "E" are displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the letters "r." are displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and an error occurs by the LEDs 57 to LED64. A number indicating the code is displayed. The LEDs 49 to 56 are turned off.

In step S4-21, the solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, control data (drive data) to be output to each solenoid 64, 65a, 65b, 66 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-22, the port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer, each solenoid 64, 65a, 65b, 66 and the like.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signal, control signal, etc.) set in the port output request buffer is output to the output port 205 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signal set in the port output request buffer is output to the hall computer. Further, the solenoids 64, 65a, 65b, and 66 are driven and controlled based on the drive signal set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-24. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt disable state that prohibits interrupts of other processes is set. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of the power-off save time processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.

In step S4-24, the test signal output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-25. In the test signal output process, test information (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is a process based on a program for executing the process related to the test specified by the game machine rules. That is, the test signal output process is a process based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The test signal tube is called during execution of timer interrupt processing.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, test information (test signal) indicating an internal state (big hit game state, time saving control execution state, special symbol lottery probability state, etc.) is sent to the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Remember.
In step S4-25, the performance display device control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-26. The performance display device control process will be described later.
In step S4-26, the register return process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restoration process, the register value saved in step S4-1 is restored. Then, after the register return processing is completed, the process returns to the main loop processing (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output process in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the dynamic port output process.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, as shown in FIG. 15, first, the process proceeds to step S29-1.
In step S29-1, the output data clearing process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-2. In the output data clearing process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, "0" is set as each bit value of the A register.
In step S29-2, the main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to the output port 0. As a result, the output port 0 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“SEGDATA0” to “SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 becomes a low level.
In step S29-3, the performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to the output port 4. As a result, the output port 4 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206 becomes a low level.

In step S29-4, the common selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether or not the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit value (“3” in the present embodiment). Then, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit value, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit value, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the common counter.
In step S29-5, the common output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-6. In the common output process, the output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to the output port 1.
Specifically, in the common output processing, when the value of the common counter = "0", the output data with "COM0" as the high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" as the low level is output. Output to port 1. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) from "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "1", the output data with "COM1" as the high level and "COM0", "COM2", and "COM3" as the low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) from "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "2", the output data in which "COM2" is set to the high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM3" are set to the low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) from "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "3", the output data in which "COM3" is set to the high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM2" are set to the low level is output to the output port 1. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) from "COM0" to "COM3".

In step S29-6, it is determined whether or not the playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the gameable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-7 and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S29-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, it is determined that the game-enabled state has occurred, and if it is not a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, the game is played. Judge that the possible state has not occurred.

In step S29-7, the main display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, the display data for the main display device 60 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. Set.
At this time, when the value of the common counter = "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is common in the LED display setting process (specifically, the normal display data setting process) in step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process. 0 Output request buffer to common 3 Display data set in the output request buffer.

In step S29-8, the main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to the output port 0.
As a result, the data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) are converted into the source driver. It is output for 250a.
That is, the display of the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, interrupt prohibition processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-10. In the interrupt prohibition process, an interrupt disable state that prohibits interrupts of other processes is set. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt prohibition state is set, execution of the power-off save time processing, timer interrupt processing, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S29-10, the performance display device output process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). The performance display device output processing will be described later.

In step S29-11, the performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, the display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer of the RAM 230, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is stored in the A register. Set.
At this time, when the value of the common counter = "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the LED display setting process (specifically, the display data setting process at the time of setting change, the setting confirmation) in step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process. The display data is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer in the time display data setting process or the abnormal time display data setting process).

In step S29-12, the performance display device data output process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-11 is output to the output port 4.
As a result, the data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer) are converted into the source driver. It is output for 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one output request buffer out of the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the performance display device output process.
The performance display device output process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. That is, the performance display device output process is a process based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device output process is called during execution of the dynamic port output process.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, first, as shown in FIG. 16, the process proceeds to step S30-1.
In step S30-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the register save processing, the values of all the registers used during the execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved in the RAM save area. In addition, all the stack pointer values used during execution of the program-based processing stored in the used area m1 are saved in the RAM save area.

In step S30-2, the performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, the display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, among the identification segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer of the RAM 230, the display data set in the area corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register. ..
At this time, when the value of the common counter = "0", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "1", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "2", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter = "3", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is set in the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control process in step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt process. It becomes the displayed data.

In step S30-3, the performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S30-2 is output to the output port 4.
As a result, data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) based on the display data set in the output request buffer (identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (identification segment output request buffer or ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, the register return process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the register return processing, the register value saved in step S30-1 (the value of the register used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the register value in step S30-1. The saved stack pointer value (the stack pointer value used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the saved stack pointer value are restored.
In step S30-5, interrupt enable processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S4-4). In the interrupt enable processing, the interrupt disable state is canceled. As a result, execution of save processing when the power is cut off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Setting-related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, as shown in FIG. 17, first, the process proceeds to step S37-1.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether or not the setting change state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the setting change state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-2 and the setting is performed. If it is determined that the changed state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S37-8.
Here, it is determined whether or not the setting change state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine status flag area is a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has occurred, and if it is not a value corresponding to the setting change state, the setting is made. It is determined that the change state has not occurred.

In step S37-2, the set value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the set value acquisition process, the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded), and the acquired set value is stored in the register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4 and the RAM clear switch If it is determined that 207 has not been pressed (No), the process proceeds to step S37-5.
Here, regarding the RAM clear switch 207, if the ON state has occurred, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if the ON state has not occurred, the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed. judge.
In step S37-4, the set value update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the set value update process, "1" is added to the set value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether or not the set value stored in the register is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (“6” in this embodiment), and the set value stored in the register is predetermined. When it is determined that the value is not less than the setting comparison value of (No), the process proceeds to step S37-6, and the setting value stored in the register is the predetermined setting comparison. If it is determined that the value is less than the value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, the set value initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-7. In the set value initialization process, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is overwritten as the set value stored in the register.
In step S37-7, the set value saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-8. In the set value saving process, the set value stored in the register is saved in the set value area of the RAM 230.

In step S37-8, when it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state and it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (it is in the OFF state) (No). Goes to step S37-9, and when it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state (Yes), the process ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). ..
Here, regarding the setting key switch 208, if the on state has occurred, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state, and if the on state has not occurred, the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. Judge that it is not done.
In step S37-9, the subcommand setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-10. In the subcommand setting process, the setting-related end specification command (subcommand) is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S37-10, the subcommand group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-11. In the subcommand group setting process, the subcommand group is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, the subcommand group includes a subcommand that specifies the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand that specifies the firing position, a subcommand that specifies the stop symbol of the first special symbol, and a stop of the second special symbol. Subcommand to specify the symbol, Special Figure 1 Subcommand to specify the number of holds, Special Figure 2 Subcommand to specify the number of holds, Subcommand to specify the value of the time reduction counter, Settings stored in the set value area of RAM 230 Includes subcommands that specify values.
In step S37-11, the ram set process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). In the ram set process, a game-enabled state is set as the game machine state.
Specifically, as a value in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230 (game machine state flag), a value corresponding to the game available state is saved (saved).

(Switch management process)
Next, the switch management process in step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the switch management process.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, first, as shown in FIG. 18, the process proceeds to step S5-1.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the gate switch 104 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the gate switch 104 is detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2 and the gate If it is determined that the ON state of the switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, the normal drawing start ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. The normal figure starting ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected (Yes), step S5-3 is performed. If it is determined in S5-4 that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. Special Figure 1 The starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected (Yes), step S5-5 is performed. If it is determined in S5-6 that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-7.
In step S5-6, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-7. Special Figure 1 The starting ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-7, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the V area switch 110 is detected, and if it is determined that the ON state of the V area switch 110 is detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-8. If it is determined that the ON state of the V area switch 110 has not been detected (No), a series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S5-8, the V passage detection process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In the V passage detection process, first, it is determined whether or not the V valid period is in effect.
Here, the "V valid period" is the first round game from the start of the first round game executed during the occurrence of any of the big hit game states from "big hit 1" to "big hit 6". It is the period until the valid time (interval time) for closing the large winning opening has elapsed after the end of.
Then, when it is determined that the V valid period is in progress, "1" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, and the V winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V validity period is not in effect, the process is terminated.

(Public figure start ball detection process)
Next, the normal drawing start ball detection process in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a normal drawing start ball detection process.
When the normal figure start ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, as shown in FIG. 19, first, the process proceeds to step S6-1.
In step S6-1, the normal figure random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the normal figure random number acquisition process, the winning random number (random number value) is acquired (loaded) from the loop counter corresponding to the normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, when it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure hold number counter is the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment), and it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is not the upper limit value. In (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3, and when it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), a series of processes is terminated and the next process (step S5-). Move to 3).
In step S6-3, the normal figure hold number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the normal figure hold number counter update process, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the normal figure hold number counter is newly set in the normal figure hold number counter.

In step S6-4, the normal figure random number storage process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the normal figure random number storage process, the winning random number acquired in step S6-1 is stored in the normal figure game information storage area of the RAM 230 as the normal figure game information.
The RAM 230 is configured to include a Fuzu game information storage area in which Fuzu game information is stored.
The Fuzu game information storage area is configured to include a storage area 0 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the Fuzu game information.
In the storage area 0, the general map game information during the execution of the game is stored. On the other hand, in the storage areas 1 to 4, the normal map game information for which the normal map winning determination is held is stored. The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (upper → lower) in descending order of priority. Then, as for the normal map game information stored in the storage areas 1 to 4, the normal map winning determination is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area having the higher priority.

(Special figure 1 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 1 starting ball detection process of step S5-4 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a special drawing 1 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, first, as shown in FIG. 20, the process proceeds to step S7-1.
In step S7-1, the special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the start port entry count counter for external information.
In step S7-2, the hold number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the hold number counter address setting process, the address of the hold number counter is set in the hold number counter address setting area of the RAM 230.
In step S7-3, the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special figure 2 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special figure 2 starting ball detection process of step S5-6 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a special drawing 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special figure 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, first, as shown in FIG. 21, the process proceeds to step S8-1.
In step S8-1, the special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the start port entry count counter for external information.
Further, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not the right-handed period is in progress. Then, when it is determined that the player is not in the right-handed period (the player is in the left-handed period), "1" is added to the value of the right-handed error counter.
In step S8-2, the hold number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the hold number counter address setting process, the address of the hold number counter in FIG. 2 is set in the hold number counter address area of the RAM 230.
In step S8-3, the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-7). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special symbol random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a special symbol random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, as shown in FIG. 22, first, the process proceeds to step S9-1.
In step S9-1, the special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, the special figure pending number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special figure hold number acquisition process, the value of the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) specified by the address set in the hold number counter address area (special figure 1 hold). Acquire (load) the number or the number reserved in Special Figure 2.

In step S9-3, the special figure random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special figure random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random number values) such as a jackpot random number, a hit symbol random number, a reach group random number, a reach mode random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to each lottery. At this time, the corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure reservations (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) acquired in step S9-2 is the upper limit value (“4” in this embodiment). If it is determined that the number of reserved special figures is not the upper limit (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5, and if it is determined that the number of reserved special figures is not the upper limit (Yes), a series of processes are performed. Is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5).
In step S9-5, the special figure hold number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special figure hold number counter update process, the value set in the special figure hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) specified by the address set in the hold number counter address area. A value obtained by adding "1" to is newly set in the special figure hold number counter.

In step S9-6, the special figure random number storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special figure random number storage process, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as special figure game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game) of the RAM 230. It is stored in the information storage area or the special figure 2 game information storage area).
The RAM 230 includes a special figure 1 game information storage area for storing special figure 1 game information and a special figure 2 game information storage area for storing special figure 2 game information.
The special figure 1 game information storage area is configured to include a storage area 0 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the special figure 1 game information.
In the storage area 0, the special figure 1 game information during the execution of the game is stored. On the other hand, in the storage areas 1 to 4, the special figure 1 game information in which the start determination is suspended is stored. The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (upper → lower) in descending order of priority. Then, the start determination of the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage areas 1 to 4 is executed in order from the one stored in the storage area having the higher priority.
The special figure 2 game information storage area is configured to include a storage area 0 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the special figure 2 game information.
In the storage area 0, the special figure 2 game information during the execution of the game is stored. On the other hand, in the storage areas 1 to 4, the special figure 2 game information in which the start determination is suspended is stored. The priority of each storage area is defined to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (upper → lower) in descending order of priority. Then, the start determination of the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage areas 1 to 4 is executed in order from the information stored in the storage area having the higher priority.

In the special figure random number storage process, when the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as the special figure 1 game information. , Special figure 1 Store in the game information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the vacant storage area (the storage area having the highest priority among the vacant storage areas) among the storage areas 1 to 4. ..
That is, when the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "1", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1. On the other hand, when the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "2", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 2. When the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "3", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3. When the value of the current special figure 1 hold number counter = "4", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 4.
On the other hand, when the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are used as the special diagram 2 game information as the special diagram 2 game. Store in the information storage area. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the vacant storage area (the storage area having the highest priority among the vacant storage areas) among the storage areas 1 to 4. ..
That is, when the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = "1", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 1. On the other hand, when the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = "2", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 2. When the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = "3", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3. When the value of the current special figure 2 hold number counter = "4", various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 4.

In step S9-7, the hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the hold number specification command setting process, the hold number specification command that specifies that the special figure hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. To do. At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery, a hold number designation command for designating that the number of special symbol 1 hold has increased by "1". Is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230, and when the value corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the hold number specification command for specifying that the special figure 2 hold number has increased by "1" is executed by the RAM 230. Stored in the subcommand output request buffer of.

In step S9-8, the pre-determination process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5). In the pre-determination process, the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure) stored (stored) in the special figure game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area) in step S9-6. 2 Various lottery results are preliminarily determined based on (hereinafter referred to as "preliminary determination target game information").
In the present embodiment, various lottery results are preliminarily determined for all game information (special figure 1 game information and special figure 2 game information).
It should be noted that the game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of the big hit game state may be configured so that the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed. Further, regarding the special figure 2 game information acquired (stored) while the time saving control is stopped, the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed, and the special figure 1 game information acquired (stored) during the execution of the time saving control is not executed. The above may be configured so that the preliminary determination of various lottery results is not executed.

In the pre-determination process, first, the pre-special figure hit determination process is executed.
In the pre-special symbol hit determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery (“big hit”, “small hit” or “missing”) is determined (pre-special symbol hit determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol big hit lottery table in which the big hit value of the special symbol lottery is registered, and a special symbol small hit lottery table in which the small hit value of the special symbol lottery is registered.
In addition, as a special figure jackpot lottery table, it corresponds to each combination of a set value ("1" to "6") and a game state ("special figure low probability state" or "special figure high probability state"). The special figure jackpot lottery table and is stored.
In addition, as a special figure small hit lottery table, a special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to special figure 1 game information (first special symbol lottery) and a special figure corresponding to special figure 2 game information (second special symbol lottery) A small hit lottery table and is stored.
In the pre-special figure hit determination process, first, the pre-special figure big hit determination process is executed.
In the pre-special figure jackpot determination process, the value (set value) set in the set value area and the current gaming state (“special figure high probability state” or “special figure low probability state”) are confirmed. , Read the special figure jackpot lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result. Then, based on the big hit random number included in the game information to be pre-determined and the special figure big hit lottery table read out, it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is won (pre-special figure big hit determination).
At this time, if the big hit random number included in the game information subject to pre-judgment matches the big hit value registered in the special figure big hit lottery table, it is determined that the "big hit" has been won (in the special symbol lottery). The result is judged as a "big hit"). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determination target game information does not match the jackpot value registered in the special figure jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "big hit" has not been won.
If it is determined by the advance special figure big hit determination process that the "big hit" has not been won, the advance special figure small hit determination process is then executed.
In the pre-special figure small hit determination process, the hold type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) of the game information subject to pre-judgment is confirmed, and the special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, based on the big hit random number included in the game information to be pre-determined and the read special figure small hit lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "small hit" is won (preliminary special figure small hit determination). ..
At this time, if the big hit random number included in the pre-judgment target game information matches the small hit value registered in the special figure small hit lottery table, it is determined that the "small hit" has been won (special). The result of the symbol lottery is judged as "small hit"). On the other hand, if the big hit random number included in the pre-determination target game information does not match the small hit value registered in the special figure small hit lottery table, it is determined that the "small hit" has not been won.
If it is determined by the advance special symbol small hit determination process that the "small hit" has not been won, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "missing".

In the pre-determination process, the pre-special symbol symbol determination process is then executed. In the pre-special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (pre-special symbol determination).
When the pre-special symbol hit determination determines "big hit" (winning), the pre-special symbol symbol determination process determines the type of "big hit symbol" (pre-special symbol symbol determination).
The ROM 220 stores a jackpot symbol lottery table in which correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of "big hit symbol" is registered. Further, as the jackpot symbol lottery table, a first jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the special figure 1 game information and a second jackpot symbol lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 game information are stored.
Then, in the first big hit symbol lottery table, "big hit symbol 1" and "big hit symbol 2" are registered as the types of "big hit symbols". On the other hand, in the second big hit symbol lottery table, "big hit symbols 3" to "big hit symbols 6" are registered as the types of "big hit symbols".
Then, when the game information to be determined in advance is the special figure 1 game information, the first big hit symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the hit symbol random number included in the game information to be determined in advance and the read first jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when the game information to be determined in advance is the special figure 2 game information, the second big hit symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information to be determined in advance and the second jackpot symbol lottery table read out.
When the pre-special symbol hit determination determines "small hit" (winning), the pre-special symbol symbol determination process determines the type of "small hit symbol" (pre-special symbol symbol determination).
The ROM 220 stores a small hit symbol lottery table in which the correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of "small hit symbol"("small hit symbol 1" to "small hit symbol 3") is registered. Further, as the small hit symbol lottery table, a first small hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the special figure 1 game information and a second small hit symbol lottery table corresponding to the special figure 2 game information are stored.
Then, when the game information to be determined in advance is the special figure 1 game information, the first small hit symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the small hit symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information to be determined in advance and the read first small hit symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when the game information to be determined in advance is the special figure 2 game information, the second small hit symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the small hit symbol is determined based on the random number of the winning symbol included in the game information to be determined in advance and the second small hit symbol lottery table read out.
When the pre-special symbol hit determination determines "missing" (lost), the pre-special symbol determination process determines "missing symbol" as the type of stop symbol (pre-special symbol determination).

In the pre-determination process, the first look-ahead designation command setting process is then executed.
In the first look-ahead designation command setting process, the first look-ahead designation command for designating the type of the stop symbol determined by the prior special symbol symbol determination is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In the pre-determination process, the pre-special figure variation mode determination process is then executed.
In the pre-special figure variation mode determination process, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) are determined.
In the pre-special figure variation mode determination process, when a "big hit" is determined by the pre-special figure hit determination, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the variation pattern number (variation pattern number) are determined by the advance variation pattern determination process at the time of winning, which will be described later. The type of fluctuation pattern) is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "missing" by the pre-special figure hit judgment, the fluctuation mode number (variation mode type), the fluctuation pattern number (variation pattern type), and the fluctuation pattern number (variation pattern type) are determined by the pre-selection fluctuation pattern judgment processing described later. Is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "small hit" by the advance special figure hit determination, the variation mode number (variation mode) is performed by either the winning advance variation pattern determination process or the losing advance variation pattern determination process. Type) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined. At this time, based on the game state (“game state A” to “game state D”) and the hold type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the pre-winning pre-variation pattern determination process and , One of the pre-variation pattern determination processes at the time of defeat is selected.
Specifically, the result of the pre-judgment hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state A", and the hold type of the pre-judgment target game information = special figure 1 game information. If, the pre-variation pattern determination process at the time of defeat is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the pre-judgment hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state A", and the hold type of the pre-judgment target game information = special figure 2 game information. In that case, the pre-variation pattern determination process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the pre-judgment hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state B", and the hold type of the pre-judgment target game information = special figure 1 game information. In that case, the pre-variation pattern determination process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the pre-judgment hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state B", and the hold type of the pre-judgment target game information = special figure 2 game information. In this case, the pre-variation pattern determination process at the time of defeat is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the pre-judgment hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state C", and the hold type of the pre-judgment target game information = special figure 1 game information. In that case, the pre-variation pattern determination process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the pre-judgment hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state C", and the hold type of the pre-judgment target game information = special figure 2 game information. In that case, the pre-variation pattern determination process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the pre-judgment hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state D", and the hold type of the pre-judgment target game information = special figure 1 game information. In that case, the pre-variation pattern determination process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, the result of the pre-judgment hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state D", and the hold type of the pre-judgment target game information = special figure 2 game information. In this case, the pre-variation pattern determination process at the time of defeat is selected.

In the winning pre-variation pattern determination process, first, the variation mode number (variation mode type) is determined (pre-winning pre-variation mode determination).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variation mode determination table in which the correspondence between the reach mode random number and the variation mode number (variation mode type) is registered.
In addition, as the winning variation mode determination table, the hold type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the game state ("game state A" to "game state D"), and the type of stop symbol ("" The winning variation mode determination table corresponding to each combination of the jackpot symbol 1 to "big hit symbol 6" or "small hit symbol 1" to "small hit symbol 3") and the value of the special fluctuation counter is stored. ing.
In each winning variation mode determination table, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the winning variation pattern determination table (information for specifying the winning variation pattern determination table) correspond to each reach mode random number. It is attached. As a result, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the variation pattern determination table at the time of winning are simultaneously selected based on each variation mode determination table at the time of winning.
In the pre-judgment mode determination at the time of winning, first, the hold type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) of the game information subject to pre-judgment and the current game state (“game state A” to “game state D”) Then, the type of the stop symbol determined by the prior special symbol determination and the value of the current special variation counter are confirmed, and the winning variation mode determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the variation pattern determination table at the time of winning are determined based on the reach mode random number included in the game information to be determined in advance and the read variation mode determination table at the time of winning. To do.
In the winning pre-variation pattern determination process, next, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined (pre-winning pre-variation pattern determination).
The ROM 220 stores a winning variation pattern determination table in which the correspondence between the variation pattern random number and the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is registered.
Further, as the winning variation pattern determination table, a plurality of winning variation pattern determination tables having different contents are stored.
In the winning pre-variation pattern determination, first, the winning pre-variation pattern determination table determined by the winning pre-variation mode determination is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read-out variation pattern determination table at the time of winning.
In the present embodiment, in the winning variation pattern determination table corresponding to the "big hit symbol", the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is set to the variation pattern number corresponding to "normal reach variation" and "super reach variation". The corresponding fluctuation pattern number and is specified (the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "non-reach fluctuation" is not registered).
As a result, when the winning variation pattern judgment table corresponding to the "big hit symbol" is selected, the variation pattern number corresponds to the variation pattern number corresponding to the "normal reach variation" or the variation pattern corresponding to the "super reach variation". The number is selected.

In the pre-decision pre-variation pattern determination process, first, the type of reach group random number (“indefinite value” or “fixed value”) included in the pre-determination target game information is determined (pre-random number type determination).
In the present embodiment, "indefinite value" and "fixed value" are defined as the types of reach group random numbers.
The "indefinite value" is a variable mode number (variable mode type), a variable pattern number (variable pattern type), and a variable mode number (type of variable pattern) when the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is acquired (memorized). Is not determined, and when the start determination (step S11-12) based on the game information is executed, the variable mode number (variable mode) is based on the number of holdings (the number of holdings in Special Figure 1 or the number of holdings in Special Figure 2) at that time. The type) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are the types of reach group random numbers that are determined.
The "fixed value" is a variable mode number (variable mode type), a variable pattern number (variable pattern type), and a variable mode number (type of variable pattern) when the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is acquired (memorized). Is the type of reach group random number that is determined.
In the present embodiment, the value of the reach group random number is updated within the range of "0" to "10006". Of "0" to "10006", "0" to "8499" are set as "indefinite values", and "8500" to "10006" are set as "fixed values".
Therefore, in the pre-random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information is less than "8500", it is determined as "indefinite value", and if it is "8500" or more, it is determined as "fixed value". ".

In the pre-decision pre-variation pattern determination process, when the pre-random number type determination determines an "indefinite value", the pre-reach group determination, the defeat pre-variation mode determination, and the defeat pre-variation pattern determination, which will be described later, are executed. Move to the next process without doing anything.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be a "fixed value" by the prior random number type determination, the advance reach group determination, the pre-decision pre-variation mode determination, and the defeat pre-variation pattern determination are executed.

In the pre-reach group determination, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which the correspondence between the reach group random number and the reach group number (type of reach group) is registered.
Further, as the reach group determination table, a reach group determination table corresponding to the "indefinite value" and a reach group determination table corresponding to the "fixed value" are stored.
In the reach group determination table corresponding to the "indefinite value", the reach group number corresponding to the "indefinite value" (hereinafter referred to as "indefinite value reach group") is registered as the reach group number. On the other hand, in the reach group determination table corresponding to the "fixed value", the reach group number corresponding to the "fixed value" (hereinafter referred to as "fixed value reach group") is registered as the reach group number.
In the pre-reach group determination, the reach group determination table corresponding to the "fixed value" is read. Then, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined based on the reach group random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read reach group determination table.

In the pre-variation mode determination at the time of defeat, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) is determined (pre-variation mode determination at the time of defeat).
The ROM 220 stores a change mode determination table at the time of defeat in which the correspondence between the reach mode random number and the change mode number (type of change mode) is registered.
In addition, as a change mode determination table at the time of defeat, the reach group number, the hold type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the number of holds (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number), and the game A change mode determination table at the time of defeat corresponding to each combination of the state (“game state A” to “game state D”) and the value of the special fluctuation counter is stored.
In each defeated fluctuation mode judgment table, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the defeated fluctuation pattern judgment table (information for specifying the defeated fluctuation pattern judgment table) correspond to each reach mode random number. It is attached. As a result, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the variation pattern determination table at the time of defeat are simultaneously selected based on each variation mode determination table at the time of defeat.
In the pre-decision mode determination, first, the reach group number determined by the pre-reach group determination, the hold type of the pre-determination target game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), and the pre-determination target game The number of holdings corresponding to the information holding type (special figure 1 holding number or special drawing 2 holding number), the current gaming state ("game state A" to "game state D"), and the value of the current special fluctuation counter. And, and read the change mode judgment table at the time of defeat corresponding to this confirmation result.
Then, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the variation pattern determination table at the time of defeat are determined based on the reach mode random number included in the game information to be determined in advance and the read out variation mode determination table at the time of defeat. To do.

In the pre-decision variation pattern determination, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined (pre-selection variation pattern determination).
The ROM 220 stores a variation pattern determination table at the time of defeat in which the correspondence between the variation pattern random number and the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is registered.
Further, as the defeated variation pattern determination table, a plurality of defeated variation pattern determination tables having different contents are stored.
In the pre-decision variation pattern determination, first, the defeated variation pattern determination table determined by the defeated pre-variation mode determination is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read-out variation pattern determination table at the time of defeat.
Here, the variation pattern determination tail at the time of defeat corresponding to the fixed value reach group corresponds to the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern number corresponding to the "normal reach variation" and the "super reach variation". The fluctuation pattern number and is specified (the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "variation without reach" is not registered).
On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern judgment tail at the time of defeat corresponding to the indefinite value reach group, the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "variation without reach" is defined as the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) ("normal reach fluctuation"). The fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" and the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" are not specified).
As a result, when the "fixed value" is determined by the prior random number type determination, the variation pattern number corresponding to the "normal reach variation" or the variation pattern number corresponding to the "super reach variation" is selected as the variation pattern number. Random numbers.

In the pre-determination process, the second and third look-ahead designation command setting processes are then executed.
In the second and third look-ahead designation command setting processes, the second look-ahead designation command that specifies the variation mode number determined by the pre-variation mode determination and the third look-ahead that specifies the variation pattern number determined by the pre-variation pattern determination are specified. The specified command and the specified command are stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Specifically, when the pre-winning pre-variation pattern determination process is executed, it is determined by the second pre-reading specification command that specifies the variation mode number determined by the pre-winning pre-variation mode determination and the winning pre-variation pattern determination. The third look-ahead specification command for specifying the variation pattern number and the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 are stored.
On the other hand, when the pre-variation pattern determination process at the time of defeat is executed and it is determined as "fixed value" by the pre-random number type determination, the second look-ahead specification command for specifying the variation mode number determined by the pre-variation mode determination at the time of defeat , The third look-ahead designation command for designating the variation pattern number determined by the pre-selection variation pattern determination at the time of defeat is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, when the pre-variation pattern judgment process at the time of defeat is executed and the pre-random number type judgment determines "indefinite value", the second look-ahead specification command for specifying "indefinite value" and the second pre-reading specification command for specifying "indefinite value" are specified. 3 The look-ahead designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special game management process)
Next, the special game management process of step S4-13 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special game management process.
In the present embodiment, as aspects related to the game based on the special figure 1 display device (first special symbol) (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 1 special game phase"), "special figure 1 fluctuation waiting state" and "special figure 1 change waiting state""1 changing state" and "special figure 1 stop symbol display state" are defined.
In addition, as phases related to the game based on the special figure 2 display device (second special symbol) (hereinafter referred to as "special figure 2 special game phase"), "special figure 2 change waiting state" and "special figure 2 change in progress""State" and "special figure 2 stop symbol display state" are defined.
Further, as a phase related to the game (big hit game state or small hit game state) based on the special electric accessory 55a (hereinafter referred to as "special game phase at the time of winning"), "state before opening of the big winning opening at the time of big hit" and ""Big hit big winning opening control state", "Big hit big winning opening closed effective state", "Big hit big winning opening end wait state", "Small hit big winning opening before opening state", ""Large winning opening control state at small hit", "Large winning opening closed effective state at small hit", "Wait state at the end of opening large winning opening at small hit", "Special electric accessory non-operating state", Is stipulated.

Further, the RAM 230 is provided with a special figure 1 special game phase flag area, a special figure 2 special game phase flag area, and a special game phase flag area at the time of winning.
In the special figure 1 special game phase flag area, one of the "special figure 1 change waiting state", the "special figure 1 changing state", and the "special figure 1 stop symbol display state" is set to the special figure 1 special game phase. The corresponding value (Special Figure 1 Special Game Phase Flag) is set (memorized). Thereby, the special figure 1 special game phase can be specified (determined) based on the value set in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area.
In the special figure 2 special game phase flag area, one of the "special figure 2 change waiting state", "special figure 2 changing state", and "special figure 2 stop symbol display state" is set to one special figure 2 special game phase. The corresponding value (Special Figure 2 Special Game Phase Flag) is set (memorized). Thereby, the special figure 2 special game phase can be specified (determined) based on the value set in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area.
In the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, "the state before opening the big winning opening at the time of big hit", "the opening control state of the big winning opening at the time of big hit", "the closed effective state of the big winning opening at the time of big hit", "opening the big winning opening at the time of big hit" End wait state ”,“ State before opening large winning opening at small hit ”,“ Opening control state of large winning opening at small hit ”,“ Effective state of closing large winning opening at small hit ”,“ End of opening large winning opening at small hit Among the "wait state" and the "special electric accessory non-operating state", a value corresponding to one special game phase at the time of winning (special game phase flag at the time of winning) is set (memorized). Thereby, the special game phase at the time of winning can be specified (determined) based on the value set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning.

Further, the ROM 220 corresponds to a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase and each special figure 2 special game phase as a special game control module (program) for controlling (executing) the special game. The special game control module to be played and the special game control module corresponding to each special game phase at the time of winning (excluding the "special electric accessory non-operating state") are stored.
Then, in the special game management process, it corresponds to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 (special figure 1 special game phase flag area, special figure 2 special game phase flag area, special game phase flag area at the time of winning). The special game control module to be played is selected, and the process based on the selected special game control module is executed.
Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, first, as shown in FIG. 23, the process proceeds to step S10-1.
In step S10-1, the special game management process of FIG. 2 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. Special Figure 2 The special game management process will be described later.
In step S10-2, the special game management process of FIG. 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. Special Figure 1 Special game management processing will be described later.
In step S10-3, the special game management process at the time of winning is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). The special game management process at the time of winning will be described later.

(Special Figure 2 Special Game Management Process)
Next, the special game management process of FIG. 2 executed in step S10-1 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special game management process of the special figure 2.
When the special game management process is executed in step S10-1, first, as shown in FIG. 24, the process proceeds to step S40-1.
In step S40-1, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory is not operating, and if it is determined that the special electric accessory is not operating (Yes), the process proceeds to step S40-2. If it is determined that the special electric accessory is not in the non-operating state (No), the series of processes is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-2).
Here, when the value set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the "special electric accessory non-operating state", it is determined that the special electric accessory is not operating. , If the value does not correspond to the "special electric accessory inactive state", it is determined that the special electric accessory is not in the inactive state.

In step S40-2, the processing target symbol setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-3. In the process target symbol setting process, a value (“1” in the present embodiment) corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) is set in the process target symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230.
As a result, the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) is set as the type of special symbol to be processed (hereinafter referred to as "processed symbol"), and the type of special symbol to be non-processed (hereinafter referred to as "design"). , "Non-processed target symbol"), the first special symbol (special diagram 1 game information) is set.
In step S40-3, the special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-4. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special figure 2 special game phase) set in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S40-4, the special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-5. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (second special game phase) acquired in step S40-3 is read out.

In step S40-5, the special game control module execution process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-2). In the special game control module execution process, the process based on the special game control module read out in step S40-4 is started.
Specifically, in the special game control module execution process, when the value acquired in step S40-3 is a value corresponding to the "special figure 2 change waiting state", the special figure change waiting process described later is started, and " When the value corresponds to the "special figure 2 changing state", the special figure changing process described later is started, and when the value corresponds to the "special figure 2 stopped symbol display state", the special figure stopped processing described later Is started.
At this time, the processing based on each special game module is executed with the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) as the processing target symbol and the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) as the non-processing target symbol.

(Special Figure 1 Special Game Management Process)
Next, the special game management process of FIG. 1 executed in step S10-2 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special game management process of Special Figure 1.
When the special game management process is executed in step S10-2, the process first proceeds to step S41-1 as shown in FIG. 25.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory is not operating, and if it is determined that the special electric accessory is not operating (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-2. If it is determined that the special electric accessory is not in the non-operating state (No), a series of processes is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-3).
Here, when the value set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the "special electric accessory non-operating state", it is determined that the special electric accessory is not operating. , If the value does not correspond to the "special electric accessory inactive state", it is determined that the special electric accessory is not in the inactive state.

In step S41-2, the process target symbol setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-3. In the process target symbol setting process, a value (“0” in the present embodiment) corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is set in the process target symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230.
As a result, the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is set as the processing target symbol, and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) is set as the non-processing target symbol.
In step S41-3, the special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-4. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (special figure 1 special game phase) set in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S41-4, the special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-5. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (first special game phase) acquired in step S41-3 is read out.

In step S41-5, the special game control module execution process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-3). In the special game control module execution process, the process based on the special game control module read out in step S41-3 is started.
Specifically, in the special game control module execution process, when the value acquired in step S41-3 is a value corresponding to the "special figure 1 change waiting state", the special figure change waiting process described later is started, and " When the value corresponds to the "special figure 1 changing state", the special figure changing process described later is started, and when the value corresponds to the "special figure 1 stopped symbol display state", the special figure stopped processing described later Is started.
At this time, the processing based on each special game module is executed with the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) as the processing target symbol and the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) as the non-processing target symbol.

(Special game management process at the time of winning)
Next, the winning special game management process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a special game management process at the time of winning.
When the winning special game management process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 26, the process first proceeds to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, the special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, the value (the special game phase at the time of winning) set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S42-2, it is determined whether or not the value acquired in step S42-1 (special game phase at the time of winning) corresponds to the "special electric accessory not operating state", and the "special electric accessory is not activated". When it is determined that the value does not correspond to the "non-operating state" (No), the process proceeds to step S42-3, and when it is determined that the value does not correspond to the "special electric accessory non-operating state" (Yes). Ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S42-3, the special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-4. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value acquired in step S42-1 (special game phase at the time of winning) is read out.

In step S42-4, the special game control module execution process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, the process based on the special game control module read out in step S42-3 is started.
Specifically, in the special game control module execution process, when the value acquired in step S42-3 is a value corresponding to the "state before opening the big winning opening at the time of big hit", the processing before opening the big winning opening, which will be described later, starts. If the value corresponds to the "big hit big winning opening control state", the big winning opening pre-opening process described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "big hit big winning opening closing effective state", When the large winning opening closing effective processing described later is started and the value corresponds to the "big winning opening opening end wait state", the large winning opening opening ending waiting processing described later is started and the "small hit big winning" is started. If the value corresponds to the "state before opening the mouth", the large winning prize opening pre-processing at the time of a small hit is started, and if the value corresponds to the "large winning opening control state at the time of a small hit", the small winning prize described later will be described. If the pre-opening process for the large winning opening at the time of hit is started and the value corresponds to the "valid state for closing the large winning opening at the time of small hit", the large winning opening closing effective processing for small hit is started and "at the time of small hit". When the value corresponds to the "large winning opening opening end wait state", the small winning large winning opening opening end wait process described later is started.

(Special figure change waiting process)
Next, the special figure change waiting process executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special figure change waiting process.
When the special figure change waiting process is executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5, as shown in FIG. 27, first, the process proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold counter) corresponding to the symbol to be processed is "1" or more, and the symbol to be processed is set. If it is determined that the value of the corresponding hold number counter is "1" or more (Yes), the process proceeds to step S11-2, and the value of the hold number counter corresponding to the symbol to be processed is not "1" or more (Yes). If it is determined (No), the process proceeds to step S11-18.
Here, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "1", the special figure 2 hold number counter becomes the hold number counter corresponding to the process target symbol.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "0", the special figure 1 hold number counter becomes the hold number counter corresponding to the process target symbol.

In step S11-2, it is determined whether or not the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the non-processed symbol specifies a "big hit symbol"("big hit symbol 1" to "big hit symbol 8"). If it is determined and it is determined that the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the non-processed symbol specifies the "big hit symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S11-3 and the non-processing is performed. If it is determined that the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed does not specify the "big hit symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S11-4.
Here, the RAM 230 is provided with a special figure 1 symbol information storage area and a special figure 2 symbol information storage area.
In the "special figure 1 symbol information storage area", symbol information corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is set (stored).
In the "special figure 2 symbol information storage area", the symbol information corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) is set (stored).
The "symbol information" is information for designating the type of the stop symbol determined by the special symbol determination (step S11-7).
Then, in step S11-2, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the "big hit symbol" is designated for the symbol information stored in the special diagram 1 symbol information storage area. It is determined whether or not it is done.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", whether or not "big hit symbol" is specified for the symbol information stored in the special figure 2 symbol information storage area. It is judged.

In step S11-3, it is determined whether or not the non-processed symbol is being displayed as stopped (during the stop time), and if it is determined that the non-processed symbol is not being displayed as stopped (No), step S11- If it is determined in step 4 that the stop display of the non-processed target symbol is in progress (Yes), the series of processes is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2 and S10-3).
Here, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "1", the non-processing target symbol is being stopped and displayed based on the value set in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area. It is determined whether or not there is. At this time, if the value set in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area is a value corresponding to the "special figure 1 stop symbol display state", it is determined that the non-processed symbol is being stopped and displayed. If the value does not correspond to the "special figure 1 stop symbol display state", it is determined that the stop display of the non-processed target symbol is not in progress.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "0", the non-processing target symbol is being stopped and displayed based on the value set in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area. Whether or not it is determined. At this time, if the value set in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area is a value corresponding to the "special figure 2 stop symbol display state", it is determined that the non-processed symbol is being stopped and displayed. If the value does not correspond to the "special figure 2 stop symbol display state", it is determined that the stop display of the non-processed target symbol is not in progress.

In step S11-4, the special figure hold number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5.
In the special figure hold number update process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the hold number counter (special figure 1 hold number counter or special figure 2 hold number counter) corresponding to the symbol to be processed.
Here, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "1", "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "0", "1" is subtracted from the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter.
In the special figure hold number update process, next, "1" is added to the value of the special fluctuation counter.
In the special figure hold number update process, next, "1" is added to the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit.
In step S11-5, the hold number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the hold number specification command setting process, a subcommand output of the RAM 230 is a hold number specification command that specifies that the hold number (special figure 1 hold number or special figure 2 hold number) corresponding to the symbol to be processed has decreased by "1". Store in the request buffer.
Here, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "1", a subcommand output request of the RAM 230 is issued to a hold number specification command that specifies that the number of holds in Special Figure 2 has decreased by "1". Store in the buffer.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the hold number specification command that specifies that the number of holds in Special Figure 1 has decreased by "1" is sent to the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. Remember in.

In step S11-6, the special symbol storage area shift process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the special symbol storage area shift process, in the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area) corresponding to the symbol to be processed, the game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game) Shift the storage area where information) is stored.
Here, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "1", the storage area in which the special figure 2 game information is stored is shifted in the special figure 2 game information storage area. That is, first, the stored contents of the storage area 1 are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 2 are shifted to the storage area 1. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 3 are shifted to the storage area 2. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 are shifted to the storage area 3. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "0", the storage area in which the special figure 1 game information is stored is shifted in the special figure 1 game information storage area. That is, first, the stored contents of the storage area 1 are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 2 are shifted to the storage area 1. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 3 are shifted to the storage area 2. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 are shifted to the storage area 3. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 are cleared (initialized).

In step S11-7, the setting abnormality determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the setting abnormality judgment processing, the occurrence of the setting abnormality is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the set value stored in the set value area of the RAM 230 is acquired. Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired set value is less than a predetermined set comparison value (“6” in this embodiment).
Then, when it is determined that the acquired set value is not less than the predetermined set comparison value (or more than the predetermined set comparison value), the value in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230 (game machine state flag) is set to the setting abnormal state. Save the corresponding value. In addition, a subcommand that specifies the occurrence of a setting error is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired set value is less than the predetermined set comparison value, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-8).

In step S11-8, the special figure hit determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the special figure hit determination process, the game information stored in the storage area 0 of the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area) corresponding to the symbol to be processed (hereinafter, "start"). The result of the special symbol lottery is determined (judgment per special symbol) based on the "judgment target game information").
Here, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "1", the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 0 of the special figure 2 game information storage area is the start determination target game. It becomes information.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "0", the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 0 of the special figure 1 game information storage area is the start determination target game information. It becomes.

Specifically, in the special symbol hit determination process, first, the symbol information set in the symbol information storage area (special symbol 1 symbol information storage area or special symbol 2 symbol information storage area) corresponding to the non-processed symbol is acquired. To do.
At this time, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "1", the symbol information set in the special figure 1 symbol information storage area is acquired. On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the symbol information set in the special figure 2 symbol information storage area is acquired.
Next, it is determined whether or not the symbol information corresponding to the acquired non-processed target symbol specifies "big hit symbol"("big hit symbol 1" to "big hit symbol 6").
Then, when it is determined that the symbol information corresponding to the acquired non-processed target symbol specifies the "big hit symbol", the special symbol jackpot determination process and the special symbol small hit determination process are not executed for the processed symbol. , The result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "out of place", and the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-9).

On the other hand, it is determined that the symbol information corresponding to the acquired non-processed symbol does not specify the "big hit symbol"("small hit symbol 1" to "small hit symbol 3" or "missing symbol" is specified). If so, first, the special figure jackpot determination process is executed for the symbol to be processed.
In the special figure jackpot determination process, the value (set value) set in the set value area and the current gaming state (“special figure high probability state” or “special figure low probability state”) are confirmed, and then The special figure jackpot lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, based on the big hit random number included in the start determination target game information and the read special figure big hit lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is won (special figure big hit determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to start determination matches the jackpot value registered in the special figure jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the player has won the "big hit" (special symbol lottery). The result is judged as a "big hit"). On the other hand, if the big hit random number included in the start determination target game information does not match the big hit value registered in the special figure big hit lottery table, it is determined that the "big hit" has not been won.
If it is determined by the special figure big hit determination process that the "big hit" has not been won, the special figure small hit determination process is then executed for the symbol to be processed.
In the special figure small hit determination process, the hold type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) of the start determination target game information is confirmed, and the special figure small hit lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, based on the big hit random number included in the start determination target game information and the read special figure small hit lottery table, it is determined whether or not the "small hit" is won (special figure small hit determination).
At this time, if the big hit random number included in the start determination target game information matches the small hit value registered in the special figure small hit lottery table, it is determined that the "small hit" has been won (special). The result of the symbol lottery is judged as "small hit"). On the other hand, if the big hit random number included in the start determination target game information does not match the small hit value registered in the special figure small hit lottery table, it is determined that the "small hit" has not been won.
When it is determined by the special symbol small hit determination process that the "small hit" has not been won, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined to be "missing" for the symbol to be processed.

In step S11-9, the special symbol symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the symbol to be processed is determined (special symbol determination).
Specifically, in the special symbol symbol determination process, first, the result of the special symbol hit determination is confirmed.
Then, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the type of "big hit symbol" is determined.
To this end, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "1", the second big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read second jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "0", the first big hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read first jackpot symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by the special figure hit determination, the type of "small hit symbol" is determined.
To this end, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "1", the second small hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the second small hit symbol lottery table read out, the type of small hit symbol (“small hit symbol 1” to “small hit symbol 3”). To judge.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "0", the first small hit symbol lottery table is read. Then, based on the winning symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read first small hit symbol lottery table, the type of small hit symbol (“small hit symbol 1” to “small hit symbol 3”). To judge.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "missing" (lost) by the special symbol hit determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of the stop symbol.
In the special symbol determination process, next, the symbol information that specifies the type of the determined stop symbol is stored in the symbol information storage area (special symbol 1 symbol information storage area or special symbol 2 symbol information storage area) corresponding to the symbol to be processed. Set to.
At this time, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "1", the symbol information that specifies the type of the determined stop symbol is set in the special figure 2 symbol information storage area.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "0", the symbol information that specifies the type of the determined stop symbol is set in the special figure 1 symbol information storage area.
In step S11-10, the symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the symbol type designation command setting process, the symbol type designation command for specifying the type of the stop symbol determined in step S11-9 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-11, the special figure stop symbol number determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the special symbol stop symbol number determination process, the stop symbol number of the symbol to be processed is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop symbol number lottery table in which the correspondence between the value of the winning symbol random number and the stop symbol number (seg data) is registered.
In addition, as a stop symbol number lottery table, a big hit stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to "big hit", a small hit stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to "small hit", and a defeat stop corresponding to "missing" The symbol number lottery table and is stored.
In addition, as a big hit stop symbol number lottery table, a big hit stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and a big hit time corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) The stop symbol number lottery table and is stored.
Further, as a stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to "small hit", a small hit stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and a second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) ) Corresponding to the small hit stop symbol number lottery table, and is stored.

In the special figure stop symbol number determination process, first, the result of the special figure hit determination is confirmed.
Then, when it is determined as "big hit" (winning) by the special symbol hit judgment, the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is confirmed, and the big hit stop symbol number lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is displayed. read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the hit symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read out jackpot stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "small hit" (winning) by the special symbol hit judgment, the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is confirmed, and the small hit stop symbol number lottery corresponding to this confirmation result is performed. Read the table. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the hit symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read small hit stop symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, if it is determined to be "missing" (lost) by the special figure hit judgment, the stop symbol number lottery table at the time of losing is read. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read-out stop symbol number lottery table at the time of defeat.
Here, the RAM 230 has a stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) and a stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information). It is provided.
Then, in the stop symbol number determination process, the determined stop symbol number is then stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed.
At this time, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "1", the determined stop symbol number is stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information). Remember.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "0", the determined stop symbol number is stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information). To do.

In step S11-12, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-13. In the special figure variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (variation mode type and variation pattern type) of the symbol to be processed is determined.
In the special figure variation pattern determination process, when a "big hit" is determined by the special figure hit determination, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the variation pattern number (variation pattern) are determined by the winning variation pattern determination process described later. Type) and is determined.
On the other hand, when it is determined to be "missing" by the special figure hit determination, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the variation pattern number (variation pattern type) are determined by the variation pattern determination process at the time of defeat, which will be described later. Will be done.
On the other hand, when it is determined as "small hit" by the special figure hit determination, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) is performed by either the winning variation pattern determination process or the losing variation pattern determination process. And the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined. At this time, based on the game state (“game state A” to “game state D”) and the hold type (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information), the winning variation pattern determination process and One of the processing for determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of defeat is selected.
Specifically, the result of the special figure hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state A", and the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area = "0". , The variation pattern determination process at the time of defeat is selected.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state A", and the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area = "1". If there is, the winning variation pattern determination process is selected.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state B", and the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area = "0". If so, the winning variation pattern determination process is selected.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state B", and the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area = "1". If there is, the change pattern determination process at the time of defeat is selected.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state C", and the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area = "0". If so, the winning variation pattern determination process is selected.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state C", and the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area = "1". If there is, the winning variation pattern determination process is selected.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state D", and the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area = "0". If so, the winning variation pattern determination process is selected.
On the other hand, when the result of the special figure hit determination = "small hit", the current game state = "game state D", and the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area = "1". If there is, the change pattern determination process at the time of defeat is selected.

In the winning variation pattern determination process, first, the variation mode number (variation mode type) is determined (winning variation mode determination).
In the winning variation mode determination, first, the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area, the current game state (“game state A” to “game state D”), and the special symbol determination are determined. The type of the stop symbol and the value of the current special fluctuation counter are confirmed, and the winning variation mode determination table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the start determination target game information and the read-out winning variation mode determination table, the variation mode number (variation mode type) and the winning variation pattern determination table are determined. To do.
In the winning variation pattern determination process, next, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined (winning variation pattern determination).
In the winning variation pattern determination, first, the winning variation pattern determination table determined by the winning variation mode determination is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the start determination target game information and the read-out variation pattern determination table at the time of winning.
In the present embodiment, in each winning variation pattern determination table, as variation pattern numbers (types of variation patterns), a variation pattern number corresponding to "normal reach variation" and a variation pattern number corresponding to "super reach variation" are displayed. , Is specified (the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "variation without reach" is not registered).
As a result, in the winning variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern number corresponding to the "normal reach variation" or the variation pattern number corresponding to the "super reach variation" is selected as the variation pattern number.

In the loss pattern determination process, first, the type of reach group random number (“indefinite value” or “fixed value”) included in the start determination target game information is determined (random number type determination).
In the random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number included in the start determination target game information is less than "8500", it is determined to be "indefinite value", and if it is "8500" or more, it is determined to be "fixed value". To do.
Next, in the loss pattern determination process, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined (reach group determination).
In the reach group determination, when the "fixed value" is determined by the random number type determination, the reach group determination table corresponding to the "fixed value" is read. On the other hand, when the "indefinite value" is determined by the random number type determination, the reach group determination table corresponding to the "indefinite value" is read out. Then, the reach group number (type of reach group) is determined based on the reach group random number included in the start determination target game information and the read reach group determination table.
In the defeated variation pattern determination process, the variation mode number (variation mode type) is determined (decision of the defeated variation mode).
In the failure mode determination, the reach group number determined by the reach group determination, the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area, and the hold number counter corresponding to the process target symbol (special figure 1 hold number counter or Check the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter), the current game state (“game state A” to “game state D”), and the value of the current special fluctuation counter, and correspond to this confirmation result. Read the variable mode judgment table at the time of defeat.
Then, the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the variation pattern determination table at the time of defeat are determined based on the reach mode random number included in the game information to be determined to start and the read out variation mode determination table at the time of defeat. To do.
In the loss pattern determination process, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is then determined (decision pattern determination).
In the defeated variation pattern determination, first, the defeated variation pattern determination table determined by the defeated variation mode determination is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the start determination target game information and the read-out variation pattern determination table at the time of defeat.
Here, the variation pattern determination tail at the time of defeat corresponding to the fixed value reach group corresponds to the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern number corresponding to the "normal reach variation" and the "super reach variation". The fluctuation pattern number and is specified (the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "variation without reach" is not registered).
On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern judgment tail at the time of defeat corresponding to the indefinite value reach group, the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "variation without reach" is defined as the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) ("normal reach fluctuation"). The fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" and the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" are not specified).
As a result, when the "fixed value" is determined by the random number type determination, the variation pattern number corresponding to the "normal reach variation" or the variation pattern number corresponding to the "super reach variation" is selected as the variation pattern number. .. On the other hand, when the "indefinite value" is determined by the random number type determination, the variation pattern number corresponding to the "reachless variation" is selected as the variation pattern number.

In step S11-13, the variation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-14. In the variation pattern command setting process, the variation mode specification command for specifying the variation mode number (variation mode type) determined in step S11-12 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
Further, the variation pattern specification command for specifying the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) determined in step S11-12 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-14, the special figure fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-15. In the special figure fluctuation time setting process, the time for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol is set.
Specifically, in the special figure fluctuation time setting process, first, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation mode number determined in step S11-12 (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 1”) is acquired.
Further, the fluctuation time (hereinafter referred to as “variation time 2”) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number determined in step S11-12 is acquired.
Then, the total time of the acquired fluctuation time 1 and the fluctuation time 2 is calculated, and the calculated total time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed.

In step S11-15, the special figure variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-16. In the special figure variation display data setting process, data for controlling the variation display of the special figure display device corresponding to the symbol to be processed is set.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special figure display timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed.
Next, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "1", a predetermined initial value is set in the special figure 2 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", a predetermined initial value is set in the special figure 1 display symbol counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.

In step S11-16, the game state update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-17. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is being executed. At this time, if the value set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is "1", it is determined that the time saving control is being executed, and if it is "0", it is determined that the time saving control is not being executed. To do.
When it is determined that the time reduction control is being executed, "1" is subtracted from the value of the first time reduction counter, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first time reduction counter after the subtraction is "0" or less.
Then, when it is determined that the value of the first time reduction counter after subtraction is "0" or less, "0" is set in the time reduction control flag area. As a result, the time saving control is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first time reduction counter after subtraction is not "0" or less, the state in which "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area is maintained. As a result, the time saving control is continued.
In the game state update process, it is next determined whether or not a special figure high probability state is occurring. At this time, if the value set in the special figure high probability state flag area of the RAM 230 is "1", it is determined that the special figure high probability state is occurring, and if it is "0", the special figure is Judge that a high probability state is not occurring.
When it is determined that the special figure high probability state is occurring, "1" is subtracted from the value of the probability variation counter, and it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation counter after the subtraction is "0" or less.
Then, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter after subtraction is "0" or less, "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area. As a result, the special figure high probability state is terminated, and the special figure low probability state is generated.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" or less, the state in which "1" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area is maintained. As a result, the special figure high probability state continues.

In steps S11-17, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2 and S10-3).
In the special game phase update process, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the value corresponding to the "special figure 2 changing state" is set in the special game phase flag area. Set.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the value corresponding to the "special figure 1 changing state" is set in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area.
In step S11-18, the customer waiting setting process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2 and S10-3). In the customer waiting setting process, a demo specification command that specifies that the customer waiting state has been started for the symbol to be processed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Processing during special figure fluctuation)
Next, the special figure changing process executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the processing during the change of the special figure.
When the special figure changing process is executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5, as shown in FIG. 28, first, the process proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, when it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed is "0", and it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed is not "0". In (No), the process proceeds to step S12-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-4.
In step S12-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special symbol display timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed is "0", and the value of the special symbol display timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed is "0". If it is determined (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special figure display timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed is not "0" (No), a series of processing is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2 and S10-3).
In step S12-3, the special figure variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2 and S10-3). In the special figure variation display data update process, the data for controlling the variation display of the special figure display device (special figure 1 display device or special figure 2 display device) corresponding to the symbol to be processed is updated.
Specifically, in the special figure variation display data update process, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "1", "1" is added to the value of the special figure 2 display symbol counter.
On the other hand, in the special figure variation display data update process, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "0", "1" is added to the value of the special figure 1 display symbol counter.

In step S12-4, the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed is a "big hit symbol"("big hit symbol 1" to "big hit symbol 6") or a "small hit symbol"("small hit symbol"). It is determined whether or not the hit symbol 1 "to" small hit symbol 3 ") is specified, and the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed is the" big hit symbol "or the" small hit symbol ". When it is determined that "" is specified (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-5, and the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed is "big hit symbol" or "small hit symbol". If it is determined that "symbol" is not specified ("outlier symbol" is specified), the process proceeds to step S12-8.
Here, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the "big hit symbol" or "small hit symbol" is selected for the symbol information stored in the special figure 2 symbol information storage area. Whether or not it is specified is determined.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", "big hit symbol" or "small hit symbol" is specified for the symbol information stored in the special symbol 1 symbol information storage area. It is determined whether or not it is done.
In step S12-5, it is determined whether or not the non-processed symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (during the fluctuation time), and if it is determined that the non-processed symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (Yes), step S12 If it is determined that the non-processed symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (No), the process proceeds to step S12-8.
Here, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the variation of the non-processing target symbol is being displayed based on the value set in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area. It is determined whether or not there is. At this time, if the value set in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area is a value corresponding to the "special figure 1 changing state", it is determined that the non-processed symbol is being displayed in change, and " If the value does not correspond to the "special figure 1 changing state", it is determined that the non-processed symbol is not being displayed in change.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the non-processing target symbol is being displayed in a variable manner based on the value set in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area. Whether or not it is determined. At this time, if the value set in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area is a value corresponding to the "special figure 2 changing state", it is determined that the non-processed symbol is being displayed in change, and " If the value does not correspond to the "special figure 2 changing state", it is determined that the non-processed symbol is not being displayed in change.

In step S12-6, the non-processed target symbol rewriting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-7. In the non-processing target symbol rewriting processing, the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area (special symbol 1 symbol information storage area or special symbol 2 symbol information storage area) corresponding to the non-processing target symbol is referred to as "missing symbol". Rewrite with the specified symbol information.
Specifically, in the non-processing target symbol rewriting processing, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "1", the symbol information stored in the special figure 1 symbol information storage area is "off". Rewrite "design" with the specified symbol information. Further, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol is rewritten to the stop symbol number corresponding to the "missing symbol".
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the symbol information stored in the special symbol 2 symbol information storage area is rewritten to the symbol information that specifies the "missing symbol". Further, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol is rewritten to the stop symbol number corresponding to the "missing symbol".
In step S12-7, the non-processing target symbol stop processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-8. In the non-processing target symbol stop processing, "0" is set as the value of the special game timer (timer for which the fluctuation time is being measured) corresponding to the non-processing target symbol.
Specifically, in the non-processing target symbol stop processing, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "1", the special game timer corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) Set "0" as the value. As a result, in the next special figure 1 special game management process (step S10-2), the variable display of the first special symbol is ended, and the stop display of the "missing symbol" is started.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "0", "0" is set as the value of the special game timer corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information). As a result, in the next special figure 2 special game management process (step S10-1), the variation display of the second special symbol is ended, and the stop display of the “missing symbol” is started.

In step S12-8, the special figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-9. In the special figure stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special figure display device corresponding to the symbol to be processed is set.
Specifically, in the special symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed is acquired. Then, the acquired stop symbol number is set in the special symbol display device corresponding to the symbol to be processed.
At this time, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "1", the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information). To get. Then, the acquired stop symbol number is set in the special figure 2 display device. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop symbol number is lit (stop display).
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is stored. get. Then, the acquired stop symbol number is set in the special figure 1 display device. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the special figure 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop symbol number is lit (stop display).

In step S12-9, the special figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-10. In the special figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed.
In step S12-10, the stop designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-11. In the stop specification command setting process, the stop specification command that specifies the stop of the symbol to be processed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a predetermined number (1 [times] in this embodiment) is added to the value of the fixed number counter for external information.
In step S12-11, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2 and S10-3).
In the special game phase update process, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the value corresponding to the "special figure 2 stop symbol display state" in the special game phase flag area. To set.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the value corresponding to the "special figure 1 stop symbol display state" is set in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area.

(Processing while the special figure is stopped)
Next, the special figure stopped processing executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the processing while the special figure is stopped.
When the special figure stop processing is executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5, as shown in FIG. 29, first, the process proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed is "0", and it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed is "0". In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed is not "0" (No), a series of processing is terminated and the next The process proceeds to the process (steps S10-2 and S10-3).
In step S13-2, the time saving control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-3. In the time saving control management process, it is determined whether or not the time saving control is terminated.
Specifically, in the time saving control management process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the second time saving counter. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the second time reduction counter after subtraction is "0".
Then, when it is determined that the value of the second time reduction counter after subtraction is "0", "0" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230. As a result, the time saving control is stopped.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second time reduction counter after subtraction is not "0"("1" or more), the state in which "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area of the RAM 230 is maintained. .. As a result, the state in which the time saving control is executed is maintained.

In step S13-3, it is determined whether or not the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed specifies "big hit symbol"("big hit symbol 1" to "big hit symbol 6"). If it is determined that the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed specifies the "big hit symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-4, and the symbol to be processed is processed. When it is determined that the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to (No) does not specify the "big hit symbol", the process proceeds to step S13-9.
Here, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", whether or not "big hit symbol" is specified for the symbol information stored in the special figure 2 symbol information storage area. Is determined.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", whether or not "big hit symbol" is specified for the symbol information stored in the special figure 1 symbol information storage area. It is judged.
In step S13-4, the game state update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the game state update process, the game state is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. As a result, a special figure low probability state occurs. Further, "0" is set in the time saving control flag area of the RAM 230. As a result, the time saving control is stopped. As a result, the gaming state becomes the "gaming state A".

In step S13-5, the special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-6. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for opening / closing control of the special electric accessory 55a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a special electric service control table corresponding to each type of "big hit symbol"("big hit symbol 1" to "big hit symbol 6"). Then, on each special electric service control table, the large winning opening closing effective time, the large winning opening closing time, the number of round games, the number of opening / closing switching corresponding to each round game, and the large winning opening solenoid corresponding to each opening / closing switching are displayed. 65 control data (solenoid control data, control time data), control data of the V region solenoid 66 during the V round game (solenoid control data, control time data), and the like are defined.
In the special electric service control data setting process, the special electric service control table corresponding to the type of "big hit symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed is read and read out. The combination control table is set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230.
At this time, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the special figure 2 corresponds to the type of "big hit symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area. The electric service control table is read, and the read special electric service control table is set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the special electric power corresponding to the type of "big hit symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the special symbol 1 symbol information storage area. The combination control table is read, and the read special electric combination control table is set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230.
In the special electric service control data setting process, next, "0" is set in the special electric service continuous operation count counter.

In step S13-6, the opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-7, the opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-8. In the opening specification command setting process, the opening specification command that specifies the type of the "big hit symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Further, a predetermined number (1 [times] in this embodiment) is added to the value of the jackpot count counter for external information.
At this time, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the opening that specifies the type of "big hit symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the special figure 2 symbol information storage area. Stores the specified command in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the opening specification that specifies the type of "big hit symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the special figure 1 symbol information storage area. Store the command in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S13-8, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2 and S10-3).
In the special game phase update process, first, the symbol information set in the symbol information storage area (special symbol 1 symbol information storage area or special symbol 2 symbol information storage area) corresponding to the symbol to be processed is converted into the final symbol information of the RAM 230. After setting (saving) in the storage area, the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed is cleared (initialized). At this time, in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed, a predetermined initial value (in the present embodiment, symbol information for designating the "missing symbol") is set.
That is, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", after the symbol information set in the special figure 2 symbol information storage area is set (saved) in the finalized symbol information storage area. , Special figure 2 In the symbol information storage area, a predetermined initial value (in the present embodiment, symbol information for designating an "outlier symbol") is set.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", after the symbol information set in the special figure 1 symbol information storage area is set (saved) in the finalized symbol information storage area. , Special figure 1 In the symbol information storage area, a predetermined initial value (in the present embodiment, symbol information for designating an "outlier symbol") is set.
In addition, in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the big winning opening at the time of big hit" is set.
Further, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "1", the value corresponding to the "special figure 2 fluctuation waiting state" is set in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the value corresponding to the "special figure 1 fluctuation waiting state" is set in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area.

In step S13-9, whether or not the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed specifies a "small hit symbol"("small hit symbol 1" to "small hit symbol 3"). If it is determined whether or not the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed specifies a "small hit symbol" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-10. , When it is determined that the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed does not specify the "small hit symbol" (the "missing symbol" is specified), (No). The process proceeds to step S13-14.
Here, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", whether or not "small hit symbol" is specified for the symbol information stored in the special figure 2 symbol information storage area. Is determined.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", whether or not "small hit symbol" is specified for the symbol information stored in the special figure 1 symbol information storage area. Is determined.

In step S13-10, the special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-11. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for opening / closing control of the special electric accessory 55a is set.
The ROM 220 stores a special electric service control table corresponding to each type of "small hit symbol". Then, in the special electric service control table corresponding to each type of "small hit symbol", the large winning opening closing effective time, the large winning opening closing time, the number of small hit games, the number of opening / closing switching corresponding to each small hit game, The control data (solenoid control data, control time data) of the large winning opening solenoid 65 corresponding to each opening / closing switching is defined.
In the special electric service control data setting process, the special electric service control table corresponding to the type of "small hit symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed is read and read out. The electric service control table is set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
At this time, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", it corresponds to the type of "small hit symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the special figure 2 symbol information storage area. The special electric service control table is read out, and the read special electric service control table is set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the special figure 1 corresponds to the type of "small hit symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area. The electric service control table is read, and the read special electric service control table is set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In the special electric service control data setting process, next, "0" is set in the special electric service continuous operation count counter.

In step S13-11, the opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-12. In the opening time setting process, a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-12, the opening designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-13. In the opening specification command setting process, the opening specification command that specifies the type of "small hit symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. ..
At this time, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the type of "small hit symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the special figure 2 symbol information storage area is specified. The opening specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the opening that specifies the type of "small hit symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the special figure 1 symbol information storage area. Stores the specified command in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S13-13, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2 and S10-3).
In the special game phase update process, first, the symbol information set in the symbol information storage area (special symbol 1 symbol information storage area or special symbol 2 symbol information storage area) corresponding to the symbol to be processed is converted into the final symbol information of the RAM 230. After setting (saving) in the storage area, the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed is cleared (initialized). At this time, in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed, a predetermined initial value (in the present embodiment, symbol information for designating the "missing symbol") is set.
That is, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", after the symbol information set in the special figure 2 symbol information storage area is set (saved) in the finalized symbol information storage area. , Special figure 2 In the symbol information storage area, a predetermined initial value (in the present embodiment, symbol information for designating an "outlier symbol") is set.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", after the symbol information set in the special figure 1 symbol information storage area is set (saved) in the finalized symbol information storage area. , Special figure 1 In the symbol information storage area, a predetermined initial value (in the present embodiment, symbol information for designating an "outlier symbol") is set.
In addition, in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the large winning opening at the time of small hit" is set.
Further, when the value set in the processing target symbol determination flag area is "1", the value corresponding to the "special figure 2 fluctuation waiting state" is set in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the value corresponding to the "special figure 1 fluctuation waiting state" is set in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area.
In steps S13-14, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2 and S10-3).
In the special game phase update process, first, the symbol information storage area (special symbol 1 symbol information storage area or special symbol 2 symbol information storage area) corresponding to the symbol to be processed is cleared (initialized). At this time, in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed, a predetermined initial value (in the present embodiment, symbol information for designating the "missing symbol") is set.
That is, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the symbol information that specifies a predetermined initial value (in the present embodiment, the "missing symbol"" in the special figure 2 symbol information storage area. ) Is set.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", a predetermined initial value (in the present embodiment, "missing symbol" is specified in the special figure 1 symbol information storage area). ) Is set.
Further, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the value corresponding to the "special figure 2 fluctuation waiting state" is set in the special figure 2 special game phase flag area.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the value corresponding to the "special figure 1 fluctuation waiting state" is set in the special figure 1 special game phase flag area.

(Pre-processing for opening the big prize opening)
Next, the large winning opening pre-opening process executed in step S42-4 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening.
When the large winning opening pre-opening process is executed in step S42-4, first, as shown in FIG. 30, the process proceeds to step S14-1.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0", and it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0". In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S14-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next The process proceeds to the process (step S4-14).
In step S14-2, the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric service continuous operation counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric service continuous operation counter.
In step S14-3, the round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start specification command setting process, the round start specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, the special electric service opening / closing switching number setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric service open / close switching count setting process, the open / close switching count corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation count counter is read by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. .. Then, the read open / close switching count is set in the special electric service open / close switching counter.
In the special electric service opening / closing switching number setting process, next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric service winning number counter.
In step S14-5, the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "big hit big winning opening open control state" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning.

(Large winning opening opening control process)
Next, the large winning opening opening control process executed in step S42-4 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening control process.
When the large winning opening opening control process is executed in step S42-4, first, as shown in FIG. 31, the process proceeds to step S16-1.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0", and it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0". In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, when it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is "0" and it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Goes to step S16-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is “0” (Yes), it goes to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4. The special electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (10 [balls] in this embodiment), and the value of the special electric service winning number counter is predetermined. When it is determined that the upper limit value of (Yes) has been reached, the process proceeds to step S16-5, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S16-5, the process of ending the large winning opening control is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the large winning opening opening control end process, the solenoid control data that specifies the stop of energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the special electric accessory 55a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S16-6, the large winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230, the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to in the large winning opening closing effective time setting process. Set to the special game timer corresponding to.
In step S16-7, the round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end specification command setting process, the round end specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "big hit big winning opening closed valid state" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning.

(Special electric service opening / closing switching process)
Next, the special electric service opening / closing switching process in steps S14-5 and S16-3 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a special electric service opening / closing switching process.
When the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5 and S16-3, as shown in FIG. 32, the process first proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, when it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is "0" and it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Moves to step S15-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service open / close switching count counter is "0" (Yes), a series of processes is completed and the next process (step S14-6). , S16-4).

In step S15-2, the special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric accessory 55a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control data setting process, the solenoid control corresponding to the value of the special electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read the data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data for designating energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the large winning opening solenoid 65 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the special electric accessory 55a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S15-3, the special electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric service control time setting process, the control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control time setting process, the control corresponding to the value of the special electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read the time. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S15-4, the special electric service open / close switching count counter update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4). In the special electric service opening / closing switching counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the special electric service opening / closing switching counter.

(Effective processing to close the winning opening)
Next, the large winning opening closing effective processing executed in step S42-4 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening closing effective process.
When the large winning opening closing effective process is executed in step S42-4, first, as shown in FIG. 33, the process proceeds to step S17-1.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0", and it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0". In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next The process proceeds to the process (step S4-14).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service continuous operation count counter has reached the specified value, and it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No. ), The process proceeds to step S17-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-5.
Here, with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230, the number of round games specified in the special electric service control table is acquired as a specified value and a determination is made. ..
In step S17-3, the large winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-4. In the large winning opening closing time setting process, the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the predetermined large winning opening closing time is set to the special game timer corresponding to the winning game. Set to.
In step S17-4, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the big winning opening at the time of big hit" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning.

In step S17-5, the ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-6, the ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the ending specification command setting process, the ending specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-7, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "big hit big winning opening opening end wait state" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning.

(Wait processing for the end of opening the big prize opening)
Next, the large winning opening opening end wait process executed in step S42-4 will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the wait processing for opening the opening of the large winning opening.
When the large winning opening opening end wait process is executed in step S42-4, first, as shown in FIG. 34, the process proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0", and it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0". In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S18-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next The process proceeds to the process (step S4-14).
In step S18-2, the game state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the game state setting process, the game state after the end of the big hit game state is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, first, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the special fluctuation counter.
Next, in the game state setting process, the probability state setting process is executed.
In the probability state setting process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230.
When it is determined that "1" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, a predetermined probability variation number (10000 [times] in this embodiment) is set as the value of the probability variation number counter, and special features Figure Set "1" in the high probability state flag area. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes the special figure high probability state.
On the other hand, when it is determined that "1" is not set ("0" is set) in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, "0" is set in the special figure high probability state flag area. As a result, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state becomes the special figure low probability state.

Next, in the game state setting process, the time reduction number of times setting process is executed.
In the time reduction number setting process, the type of the stop symbol (“big hit symbol”) specified by the symbol information stored in the confirmed symbol information storage area, the game state at the time of start determination (at the time of special symbol hit determination), and V prize Check the value of the flag area and set the number of time reductions according to the confirmation result in the time reduction counter.
At this time, when the stop symbol = "big hit symbol 1", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "0" or "1". , Time reduction number = 100 [times] is set in the first time reduction counter, time reduction number = 100 [times] is set in the second time reduction counter, and "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area. ..
On the other hand, when the stop symbol = "big hit symbol 2", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "0", the number of time reductions = 100. [Times] is set in the first time reduction counter, the number of time reductions = 100 [times] is set in the second time reduction counter, and "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area.
On the other hand, when the stop symbol = "big hit symbol 2", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "1", the number of time reductions = 10000. [Times] is set in the first time reduction counter, the number of time reductions = 10000 [times] is set in the second time reduction counter, and "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area.
On the other hand, when the stop symbol = "big hit symbol 3", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "0" or "1". The number of time reductions = 100 [times] is set in the first time reduction counter, the number of time reductions = 100 [times] is set in the second time reduction counter, and "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area.
On the other hand, when the stop symbol = "big hit symbol 4", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "0", the number of time reductions = 100. [Times] is set in the first time reduction counter, the number of time reductions = 100 [times] is set in the second time reduction counter, and "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area.
On the other hand, when the stop symbol = "big hit symbol 4", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "1", the number of time reductions = 10000. [Times] is set in the first time reduction counter, the number of time reductions = 10000 [times] is set in the second time reduction counter, and "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area.
On the other hand, when the stop symbol = "big hit symbol 5", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "0", the number of time reductions = 100. [Times] is set in the first time reduction counter, the number of time reductions = 100 [times] is set in the second time reduction counter, and "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area.
On the other hand, when the stop symbol = "big hit symbol 5", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "1", the number of time reductions = 10000. [Times] is set in the first time reduction counter, the number of time reductions = 10000 [times] is set in the second time reduction counter, and "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area.
On the other hand, when the stop symbol = "big hit symbol 6", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "0", the number of time reductions = 100. [Times] is set in the first time reduction counter, the number of time reductions = 100 [times] is set in the second time reduction counter, and "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area.
On the other hand, when the stop symbol = "big hit symbol 6", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "1", the number of time reductions = 100. [Times] is set in the first time reduction counter, the number of time reductions = 1 [times] is set in the second time reduction counter, and "1" is set in the time reduction control flag area.

Next, in the game state setting process, the flag initialization process is executed.
In the flag initialization process, "0" is set in the V winning flag area. Further, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit.
As described above, one of the "game state A" to "game state D" is set as the game state after the end of the jackpot game state.

In step S18-3, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, first, the confirmed symbol information storage area is cleared (initialized). In addition, in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to the "special electric accessory not operating state" is set.

(Pre-processing for opening the big prize opening at the time of small hit)
Next, the small hit large winning opening pre-opening process executed in step S42-4 will be described.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process of the large winning opening at the time of a small hit.
When the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening at the time of a small hit is executed in step S42-4, first, as shown in FIG. 35, the process proceeds to step S50-1.
In step S50-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0", and it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0". In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S50-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next The process proceeds to the process (step S4-14).
In step S50-2, the special electric service continuous operation number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-3. In the special electric service continuous operation counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric service continuous operation counter.
In step S50-3, the round start designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-4. In the round start specification command setting process, the round start specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S50-4, the special electric service opening / closing switching number setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-5. In the special electric service open / close switching count setting process, the open / close switching count corresponding to the value of the special electric service continuous operation count counter is read by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. .. Then, the read open / close switching count is set in the special electric service open / close switching counter.
In the special electric service opening / closing switching number setting process, next, "0" is set as the value of the special electric service winning number counter.
In step S50-5, the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-6. The special electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S50-6, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "small hit large winning opening open control state" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning.

(Large winning opening control process for small hits)
Next, the small hit large winning opening opening control process executed in step S42-4 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening control process at the time of a small hit.
When the small hit large winning opening control process is executed in step S42-4, as shown in FIG. 36, first, the process proceeds to step S51-1.
In step S51-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0", and it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0". In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S51-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not “0” (No), the process proceeds to step S51-4.

In step S51-2, when it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is "0" and it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Goes to step S51-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), it goes to step S51-5.
In step S51-3, the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S51-4. The special electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S51-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (8 [balls] in this embodiment), and the value of the special electric service winning number counter is predetermined. When it is determined that the upper limit value of (Yes) has been reached, the process proceeds to step S51-5, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S51-5, the process of ending the large winning opening control is executed, and the process proceeds to step S51-6. In the large winning opening opening control end process, the solenoid control data that specifies the stop of energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the special electric accessory 55a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S51-6, the large winning opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S51-7. In the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230, the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to in the large winning opening closing effective time setting process. Set to the special game timer corresponding to.
In step S51-7, the round end designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S51-8. In the round end specification command setting process, the round end specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S51-8, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "small hit large winning opening closed valid state" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning.

(Special electric service opening / closing switching process)
Next, the special electric service opening / closing switching process in steps S50-5 and S51-3 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a special electric service opening / closing switching process.
When the special electric service opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S50-5 and S51-3, as shown in FIG. 37, first, the process proceeds to step S52-1.
In step S52-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Moves to step S52-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special electric service open / close switching count counter is "0" (Yes), a series of processes is completed and the next process (step S50-6). , S51-4).

In step S52-2, the special electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S52-3. In the special electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric accessory 55a to the open state or the closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control data setting process, the solenoid control corresponding to the value of the special electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read the data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data for designating energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the large winning opening solenoid 65 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the special electric accessory 55a is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S52-3, the special electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S52-4. In the special electric service control time setting process, the control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S52-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric service control time setting process, the control corresponding to the value of the special electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read the time. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S52-4, the special electric service open / close switching count counter update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S50-6 or S51-4). In the special electric service opening / closing switching counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the special electric service opening / closing switching counter.

(Effective processing to close the big prize opening at the time of small hit)
Next, the small hit large winning opening closing effective processing executed in step S42-4 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an effective process for closing the large winning opening at the time of a small hit.
When the small hit large winning opening closing effective process is executed in step S42-4, first, as shown in FIG. 38, the process proceeds to step S53-1.
In step S53-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0", and it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0". In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S53-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next The process proceeds to the process (step S4-14).

In step S53-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the special electric service continuous operation counter has reached the specified value, and it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No). ), The process proceeds to step S53-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric service continuous operation number counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S53-5.
Here, with reference to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230, the number of round games specified in the special electric service control table is acquired as a specified value and a determination is made. ..
In step S53-3, the large winning opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S53-4. In the large winning opening closing time setting process, the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230 is referred to, and the predetermined large winning opening closing time is set to the special game timer corresponding to the winning game. Set to.
In step S53-4, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before opening the large winning opening at the time of small hit" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning.

In step S53-5, the ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S53-6. In the ending time setting process, a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game by referring to the special electric service control table set in the special electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S53-6, the ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S53-7. In the ending specification command setting process, the ending specification command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S53-7, the special game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "small hit large winning opening opening end wait state" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning.

(Large winning opening end weight processing at the time of small hit)
Next, the small hit large winning opening opening end wait process executed in step S42-4 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing a wait process for opening and ending the large winning opening at the time of a small hit.
When the small hit large winning opening opening end wait process is executed in step S42-4, first, as shown in FIG. 39, the process proceeds to step S59-1.
In step S59-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0", and it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0". In the case (Yes), the process proceeds to step S59-2, and when it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the next The process proceeds to the process (step S4-14).
In step S59-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is "1" or more, and when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is "1" or more (Yes), step S59-3 If it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter is not "1" or more ("0" or less), the process proceeds to step S59-6.
In step S59-3, it is determined whether or not the confirmed symbol is "small hit symbol 3", and when it is determined that the confirmed symbol is "small hit symbol 3" (Yes), step S59-4 is performed. If it is determined that the confirmed symbol is not "small hit symbol 3" (No), the process proceeds to step S59-7.
The "fixed symbol" is a type of stop symbol specified by the symbol information set in the confirmed symbol information storage area.
In step S59-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the after-hit rotation speed counter is a predetermined number (100 [times] in this embodiment) or less, and the value of the after-hit rotation speed counter is a predetermined number or less. If it is determined (Yes), the process proceeds to step S59-5, and if it is determined that the value of the rotation speed counter after the big hit exceeds a predetermined number (No), the process proceeds to step S59-6.
In step S59-5, the time saving control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S59-6. In the time saving control end processing, the time saving control is ended (stopped).
Specifically, in the time saving control end processing, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the time saving counter, and “0” is set in the time saving control flag area. As a result, the time saving control is terminated.
It also stops the output of external information that specifies that the time saving control is being executed. Further, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the special fluctuation counter for executing the special fluctuation after the end of the time saving control.
In step S59-6, the special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, first, the confirmed symbol information storage area is cleared (initialized). In addition, in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to the "special electric accessory not operating state" is set.
In step S59-7, it is determined whether or not the confirmed symbol is "small hit symbol 2", and if it is determined that the confirmed symbol is "small hit symbol 2" (Yes), step S59-5 is performed. If it is determined that the confirmed symbol is not "small hit symbol 2" (it is "small hit symbol 1"), the process proceeds to step S59-6.

(Normal game management process)
Next, the normal game management process of step S4-14 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a normal game management process.
In the present embodiment, the phases related to the game based on the normal map display device (normal symbol) (hereinafter referred to as the "normal map normal game phase") are "the normal figure change waiting state" and "the normal figure changing state". , "Normal figure stop symbol display state" is stipulated.
In addition, as aspects related to the game (game state per normal figure) based on the normal electric accessory 71b (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phase at the time of winning"), "state before opening of the normal electric accessory" and "normal electric accessory""Absolute opening control state", "Public figure electric accessory closing effective state", "Public figure electric accessory opening end wait state", and "Normal electric accessory non-operating state" are defined.

Further, the RAM 230 is provided with a normal game phase flag area for normal drawing and a normal game phase flag area for winning.
In the normal game phase flag area of the normal figure, one of the "waiting state for changing the normal figure", the "changing state of the normal figure", and the "displaying state of the stopped symbol of the normal figure" corresponds to one of the normal game phases of the normal figure (normal). Figure Normal game phase flag) is set (memorized). As a result, the normal game phase can be specified (determined) based on the value set in the normal game phase flag area.
At the time of winning, in the normal game phase flag area, "Public figure electric accessory opening pre-opening state", "Public figure electric accessory opening control state", "Public figure electric accessory closing effective state", "Public figure electric accessory opening" Among the "end wait state" and the "normal electric accessory non-operating state", a value corresponding to one winning normal game phase (winning normal game phase flag) is set (memorized). As a result, the winning normal game phase can be specified (determined) based on the value set in the winning normal game phase flag area.

Further, the ROM 220 has a special game control module corresponding to each normal game phase as a normal game control module (program) for controlling (execution) the special game, and a normal game phase ("normal electric") at the time of each winning. The normal game control module corresponding to the "non-operating state of the accessory") is stored.
Then, in the normal game management process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area (normal game phase flag area at the time of winning, the normal game phase flag area at the time of winning) of the RAM 230 is selected and selected. The processing based on the normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, first, as shown in FIG. 40, the process proceeds to step S55-1.
In step S55-1, the normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S55-2. The normal game management process will be described later.
In step S55-2, the normal game management process at the time of winning is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). The normal game management process at the time of winning will be described later.

(Public map normal game management process)
Next, the general game management process executed in step S55-1 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a normal game management process.
When the normal game management process is executed in step S55-1, first, as shown in FIG. 41, the process proceeds to step S56-1.
In step S56-1, it is determined whether or not the normal electric accessory is not operating, and if it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not operating (Yes), the process proceeds to step S56-2. If it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not in the non-operating state (No), a series of processes is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
Here, when the value set in the normal game phase flag area at the time of winning of the RAM 230 is a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory non-operating state", it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not operating. , If the value does not correspond to the "normal electric accessory inactive state", it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not in the inactive state.

In step S56-2, the normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S56-3. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S56-3, the normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S56-4. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (normal game normal game phase) acquired in step S56-2 is read out.
In step S56-4, the normal game control module execution process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2). In the normal game control module execution process, the process based on the normal game control module read out in step S56-3 is started.
Specifically, in the normal game control module execution process, when the value acquired in step S56-2 is a value corresponding to the "normal map fluctuation waiting state", the normal map fluctuation waiting process described later is started, and the "normal map fluctuation waiting state" is started. If the value corresponds to the "figure changing state", the normal figure changing processing described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "normal figure stop symbol display state", the normal figure stopped processing described later is started. Ru.

(Normal game management process at the time of winning)
Next, the winning normal game management process executed in step S55-2 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a normal game management process at the time of winning.
When the winning normal game management process is executed in step S55-2, first, as shown in FIG. 42, the process proceeds to step S57-1.
In step S57-1, the normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S57-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, the value (normal game phase at the time of winning) set in the winning normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S57-2, it is determined whether or not the value acquired in step S57-1 (normal game phase at the time of winning) corresponds to the "normal electric accessory non-operating state", and the "ordinary electric accessory is not activated". When it is determined that the value does not correspond to the "non-operating state" (No), the process proceeds to step S57-3, and when it is determined that the value does not correspond to the "normal electric accessory non-operating state" (Yes). Ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S57-3, the normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S57-4. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the normal game control module corresponding to the value acquired in step S57-1 (normal game phase at the time of winning) is read out.

In step S57-4, the normal game control module execution process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game control module execution process, the process based on the special game control module read out in step S57-3 is started.
Specifically, in the normal game control module execution process, when the value acquired in step S57-1 is a value corresponding to the "state before opening the normal electric accessory", the process before opening the normal electric accessory, which will be described later, starts. If the value corresponds to the "normal electric accessory opening control state", the ordinary electric accessory opening control process described later is started, and if the value corresponds to the "ordinary electric accessory closing effective state", the value will be described later. When the normal electric accessory closing effective process is started and the value corresponds to the "ordinary electric accessory opening end wait state", the ordinary electric accessory opening end wait process described later is started.

(Waiting for changes in normal map)
Next, the normal map fluctuation waiting process executed in step S55-1 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the normal map fluctuation waiting process.
When the normal figure fluctuation waiting process is executed in step S55-1, first, as shown in FIG. 43, the process proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure hold number counter is "1" or more, and when it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is "1" or more (Yes). , Step S20-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal figure hold number counter is not "1" or more (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2). To do.
In step S20-2, the process of updating the number of reserved numbers is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the normal figure hold number update process, the normal figure hold number is updated.
Specifically, in the normal figure hold number update process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the normal figure hold number counter.
Next, in the Fuzu game information storage area, the storage area in which the Fuzu game information is stored is shifted. That is, first, the stored contents of the storage area 1 are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 2 are shifted to the storage area 1. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 3 are shifted to the storage area 2. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 are shifted to the storage area 3. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 are cleared (initialized).

In step S20-3, the normal figure winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal figure winning judgment process, in the normal figure winning judgment process, it is normal based on the normal figure game information (hereinafter referred to as "judgment target game information") stored in the storage area 0 of the normal figure game information storage area. Judge the result of the symbol lottery (judgment of winning a normal figure).
In the ROM 220, a general drawing winning lottery table in which the winning value of the ordinary symbol lottery is registered is stored. In addition, as the normal figure winning lottery table, the normal drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the execution of the time saving control (during the normal figure high probability state) and the normal drawing corresponding to the time saving control stopped (during the normal figure low probability state) The winning lottery table and is stored.
In the normal figure winning judgment process, the normal figure winning judgment is made based on the winning random number included in the game information to be judged and the normal drawing winning lottery table corresponding to the current execution status (running or stopped) of the time saving control. To execute.
At this time, if the value of the winning random number included in the game information to be determined matches the winning value registered in the normal figure winning lottery table, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be "winning" (winning). ..
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number included in the game information to be determined does not match the winning value registered in the normal figure winning lottery table, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined to be "missing" (losing).

In step S20-4, the normal figure stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal symbol stop symbol determination process, the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number) of the normal symbol is determined (normal symbol stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop symbol determination process, when the normal symbol winning determination determines "hit" (winning), the "normal symbol per symbol" is determined as the type of stop symbol (stop symbol number).
On the other hand, when it is determined as "missing" (lost) by the normal symbol winning determination, "missing symbol" is determined as the type of stopped symbol (stop symbol number).
Next, the determined stop symbol type (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S20-5, the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the normal figure fluctuation pattern determination process, the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number) of the normal symbol is determined (normal figure fluctuation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process, when the time saving control is stopped (during the low probability state of the normal map), the first type (this) is set as the normal map fluctuation pattern type (variation pattern number). In the embodiment, the type corresponding to the first fluctuation time (0.5 [s]) is determined.
On the other hand, when the time reduction control is being executed (during the high probability state of the normal map), the second type (in the present embodiment, the second fluctuation time (21)) is set as the type of the normal map fluctuation pattern (variation pattern number). (Type corresponding to the fluctuation time of 0.0 [s]) is determined.

In step S20-6, the normal map fluctuation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the normal map fluctuation time setting process, the fluctuation time corresponding to the type (variation pattern number) of the normal map fluctuation pattern determined in step S20-6 is acquired. Then, the acquired fluctuation time is set in the normal game timer.
At this time, when the time reduction control is stopped (in the low probability state of the normal figure), the first fluctuation time (0.5 [s]) is set as the fluctuation time, and the time reduction control is being executed (normal figure). In the high probability state), the second fluctuation time (21.0 [s]) is set as the fluctuation time.
In step S20-7, the normal map variation display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the normal map fluctuation display data setting process, data for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal map variation display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the normal map display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the normal figure display symbol counter. As a result, among a predetermined number of segments constituting the normal figure display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal figure display symbol counter is controlled to be lit.
In step S20-8, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game phase changing state" is set in the normal game phase flag area.

(Processing during fluctuation of general map)
Next, the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map executed in step S55-1 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map.
When the normal-figure changing process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 44, first, the process proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure display timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal figure display timer is "0" (Yes), step S21- When the process shifts to 3 and it is determined that the value of the normal map display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
In step S21-3, the normal map variation display data update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2). In the normal map fluctuation display data update process, the data for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal map display device is updated.
Specifically, in the normal map variation display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the normal figure display symbol counter.

In step S21-4, the normal figure stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the normal map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the normal map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
Next, the acquired stop symbol number is set as the value of the normal symbol display symbol counter. As a result, of the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal figure display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal figure display symbol counter is lit (stop display).
In step S21-5, the normal figure stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the normal figure stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal figure stop symbol display state" is set in the normal game phase flag area.

(Processing while the normal drawing is stopped)
Next, the process of stopping the normal drawing executed in step S55-1 will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the processing while the normal drawing is stopped.
When the normal-figure stopped processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 45, first, the process proceeds to step S22-1.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S22-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a "normal symbol per symbol", and if it is determined that the stop symbol is not a "normal symbol per symbol" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3. Then, when it is determined (Yes) that the stop symbol is a “normal symbol per symbol”, the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal map fluctuation waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area.

In step S22-4, the ordinary electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the ordinary electric accessory control data setting process, control data for opening / closing control of the ordinary electric accessory 71b is set.
The ROM 220 stores a normal electric service control table corresponding to the execution status (execution or stop) of the time saving control. Then, on each ordinary electric service control table, the time before the ordinary electric service is opened, the normal electric service closing effective time, the opening end wait time, the number of times of opening / closing switching, and the control of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64 corresponding to each opening / closing switching are performed. Data (solenoid control data, control time data), control data of the sorting movable body solenoid 67 (solenoid control data, control time data), and the like are specified.
In particular, the first opening / closing pattern is defined as the opening / closing pattern of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64 in the ordinary electric service control table corresponding to the time saving control being stopped (during the low probability state of the normal drawing). On the other hand, a second opening / closing pattern is defined as an opening / closing pattern of the normal electric accessory solenoid 64 in the ordinary electric service control table corresponding to the execution of the time saving control (during the high probability state of the normal figure).
In addition, the normal electric service control table corresponding to the time saving control stopped (during the low probability state of the normal figure) and the normal electric service control table corresponding to the execution of the time saving control (during the high probability state of the normal figure) are included. A specific distribution pattern is defined as the distribution pattern of the distribution movable body 71c.
In the normal electric service control data setting process, the normal electric service control table corresponding to the execution status (execution or stop) of the time saving control is read, and the read normal electric service control table is stored in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Set.
Next, the number of open / close switching is read out with reference to the ordinary electric service control table set in the ordinary electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read open / close switching count is set in the normal electric service open / close switching counter. In addition, "0" is set as the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter.

In step S22-5, the time setting process before opening the normal electric service is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the normal electric service opening time setting process, a predetermined normal electric service opening time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-6, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
In the normal game phase update process, first, in the normal game phase flag area at the time of winning, a value corresponding to the "state before opening of the normal electric accessory" is set.
In addition, in the normal game phase flag area of the normal map, a value corresponding to the "waiting state for fluctuation of the normal map" is set.

(Normal electric accessory opening pretreatment)
Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening pretreatment executed in step S55-2 will be described.
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the pre-opening process of the ordinary electric accessory.
When the ordinary electric accessory opening pretreatment is executed in step S55-2, first, as shown in FIG. 46, the process proceeds to step S23-1.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S23-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, the normal electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The normal electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release control state" is set in the normal game phase flag area at the time of winning.

(Normal electric accessory opening control process)
Next, the ordinary electric accessory opening control process executed in step S55-2 will be described.
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening control process.
When the ordinary electric accessory opening control process is executed in step S55-2, first, as shown in FIG. 47, the process proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S25-2 is performed. If it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, when it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching count counter is "0" and it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Steps to step S25-3, and if it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching count counter is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, the normal electric service opening / closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4. The normal electric service opening / closing switching process will be described later.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether or not the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (3 [balls] in this embodiment), and the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter is predetermined. When it is determined that the upper limit value of (Yes) has been reached, the process proceeds to step S25-5, and when it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric service winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No). Ends a series of processes and proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, the normal electric service release control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric service release control end process, the solenoid control data for designating the power supply stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the normally electric accessory 71b is controlled to be closed.
In step S25-6, the normal electric service closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the ordinary electric service closing effective time setting process, a predetermined ordinary electric service closing effective time is set in the ordinary game timer with reference to the ordinary electric service control table set in the ordinary electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S25-7, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory closed effective state" is set in the normal game phase flag area at the time of winning.

(Normal electric service opening / closing switching process)
Next, the normal electric service opening / closing switching process in steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a normal electric service opening / closing switching process.
When the normal electric service opening / closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, first, as shown in FIG. 48, the process proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching count counter is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter is not "0" (No). Moves to step S24-2, and when it is determined that the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is "0" (Yes), a series of processes is completed and the next process (step S23-3). , S25-4).
In step S24-2, the normal electric service control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the ordinary electric accessory control data setting process, control data for controlling the ordinary electric accessory 71b to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric service control data setting process, the solenoid corresponding to the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Read control data. Then, the read solenoid control data (control data for designating energization or energization stop) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the control of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data is started, and the ordinary electric accessory 71b is controlled to the open state or the closed state.

In step S24-3, the normal electric service control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric service control time setting process, the control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric service control time setting process, the control time corresponding to the value of the normal electric service open / close switching count counter is referred to by referring to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230. Is read. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, the normal electric service open / close switching count counter update process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S23-3 and S25-4). In the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the normal electric service opening / closing switching counter.

(Normal electric accessory closure effective processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory closing effective process executed in step S55-2 will be described.
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory closing effective process.
When the normal electric accessory closing effective process is executed in step S55-2, first, as shown in FIG. 49, the process proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S26-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S26-2, the opening end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the release end wait time setting process, a predetermined release end wait time is set in the normal game timer with reference to the normal electric service control table set in the normal electric service control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S26-3, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory opening end wait state" is set in the normal game phase flag area at the time of winning.

(Normal electric accessory opening end weight processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening end wait process executed in step S55-2 will be described.
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a normal electric accessory opening end wait process.
When the ordinary electric accessory opening end wait process is executed in step S55-2, first, as shown in FIG. 50, the process proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal game timer is "0", and when it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), step S27-2 is performed. When the transition is made and it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, the normal game phase update process is executed, a series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory not operating state" is set in the normal game phase flag area at the time of winning.

(Performance display device control processing)
Next, the performance display device control process in step S4-25 will be described.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the performance display device control process.
The performance display device control process is a process based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. That is, the performance display device control process is a process based on the program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device control process is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, the process proceeds to step S38-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S38-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-2. In the register save processing, the values of all the registers used during the execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1 are saved in the RAM save area. In addition, all the stack pointer values used during execution of the program-based processing stored in the used area m1 are saved in the RAM save area.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether or not the playable state has occurred (set), and if it is determined that the gameable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3 and the game is played. If it is determined that the possible state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S38-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a game-enabled state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, it is determined that the game-enabled state has occurred, and if it is not a value corresponding to the game-enabled state, the game is played. Judge that the possible state has not occurred.
In step S38-3, the total outcounter addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In the total count counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the total out counter is not added.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not it is in a predetermined gaming state, and if it is determined that it is in a predetermined gaming state (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-5 and it is determined that it is not in a predetermined gaming state. If (No), the process proceeds to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined game state" is a game state in which the "special figure low probability state" has occurred, the time saving control is stopped, and the jackpot game state has not occurred. ..
In step S38-5, the normal outcounter addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter addition process, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 is detected, "1" is usually added to the value of the out counter. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the out counter is not normally added.

In step S38-6, the normal prize ball counter addition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 is detected, the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the first start port 51 is added to the value of the normal prize ball counter. Add "4". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, the number of prize balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52 is added to the value of the normal prize ball counter. Add "1". On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the electric ball inlet switch 105 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the electric ball entry switch 105 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the electric ball entry device 71. 1 ”is added. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the electric ball entry switch 105 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the first non-electric ball entry switch 111 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the first non-electric ball entry switch 111 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the first non-electric ball entry device 72. Add "15", which is the number of prize balls. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the first non-electric ball entry switch 111 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the second non-electric ball entry switch 112 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the second non-electric ball entry switch 112 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the second non-electric ball entry device 73. Add "15", which is the number of prize balls. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the second non-electric ball entry switch 112 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the left winning opening switch winning ball 106 is detected. Then, when it is determined that the ON state of the left winning opening switch winning ball 106 is detected, the number of winning balls paid out according to the entry of the game ball into the left other winning opening 57a to 57c is added to the value of the normal prize ball counter. "4" is added. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ON state of the left winning opening switch winning ball 106 has not been detected, the value of the normal winning ball counter is not added.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), step S38-8 If it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-9.
In the present embodiment, the reference value = 60000 × n (n = integer). Note that "n" is a value indicating the current section, and "1" is set as an initial value.
In step S38-8, the section update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the section update process, first, the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to the base value buffer 2 of the RAM 230.
Next, a predetermined initial value (“0” in this embodiment) is set as the value of the normal out counter. Further, a predetermined initial value (“0” in the present embodiment) is set as the value of the normal prize ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current interval. As a result, the reference value is updated.

In step S38-9, the base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, the base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal prize ball counter. Then, the calculated base ratio is stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230.
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal prize ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

In step S38-10, the base ratio display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, the display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 is provided with an identification segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, which of the base ratio of the current section and the base ratio of the previous section is to be displayed is selected.
Then, when the display of the base ratio of the current section is selected, the information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and the information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set. Set in the ratio segment output request buffer.

Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. The display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to. The display data corresponding to the ones digit is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the characters "b" are displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the characters "b" are displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and the current characters "b" are displayed by the LEDs 49 to LED56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and LEDs 57 to LED64 display a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio.

On the other hand, when the display of the base ratio of the previous section is selected, the information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and the information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set. Set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, and the display data (8 bits) of "c" is set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer. The display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to. The display data corresponding to the ones digit is set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, among the light emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the characters "b" are displayed by the LEDs 33 to LED40, the character "c" is displayed by the LEDs 41 to LED48, and the current characters "c" are displayed by the LEDs 49 to LED56. A number indicating the tens digit of the base ratio is displayed, and LEDs 57 to LED64 display a number indicating the ones digit of the current base ratio.

In step S38-11, the register return process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-12. In the register return processing, the register value saved in step S38-1 (the value of the register used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the register value in step S38-1. The saved stack pointer value (the stack pointer value used during execution of the processing based on the program stored in the used area m1) and the saved stack pointer value are restored.
In step S38-12, interrupt enable processing is executed, a series of processing is completed, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step S4-26). In the interrupt enable processing, the interrupt disable state is canceled. As a result, execution of save processing when the power is cut off, timer interrupt processing, and the like is permitted.

(Various effects performed on pachinko machine 1)
Next, various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.

(Hold production)
First, the hold effect (hold display) executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, each game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) stored in the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area and special figure 2 game information storage area) is targeted. The hold effect is executed.
The hold effect is that the notification display (start determination) of the special symbol based on the game information (hereinafter referred to as "hold effect target game information") that is the target of the hold effect is suspended, or the hold effect. It is an effect that suggests (notifies) that the notification display (variable display or stop display) of the special symbol based on the target game information is being executed.
In the hold effect, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target game information is displayed in the hold symbol display areas b1 and b2.
Specifically, in the reserved symbol display area b1, as a display position (display unit) in which the reserved symbol h is displayed, there are five storage areas (storage areas 0 to 4) of the special figure 1 game information storage area. The display position corresponding to each is specified.
Further, the reserved symbol display area b2 corresponds to each of the five storage areas (storage area 0 to 4) of the special figure 2 game information storage area as the display position (display unit) on which the reserved symbol h is displayed. The display position to be displayed is specified.
Then, in the hold effect in which the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is the target game information for the hold effect, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target game information is displayed in the hold symbol display area b1.
That is, during the period in which the reserved effect target game information is stored in each storage area (storage area 0 to 4), the reserved effect target is located at a position corresponding to the storage area in the reserved symbol display area b1. The reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information is displayed.
As a result, in the reserved symbol display area b1, the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 game information in which the notification display (start determination) of the special symbol is suspended at the position corresponding to each of the storage area 1 to the storage area 4. h is displayed, and at the position corresponding to the storage area 0, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special figure 1 game information during execution of the notification display (variable display or stop display) of the special symbol is displayed.
On the other hand, in the hold effect in which the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) is the target game information for the hold effect, the hold symbol h corresponding to the hold effect target game information is displayed in the hold symbol display area b2.
That is, during the period in which the reserved effect target game information is stored in each storage area (storage area 0 to 4), the reserved effect target is located at a position corresponding to the storage area in the reserved symbol display area b2. The reserved symbol h corresponding to the game information is displayed.
As a result, in the reserved symbol display area b2, the reserved symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 game information in which the notification display (start determination) of the special symbol is suspended at the position corresponding to each of the storage area 1 to the storage area 4. h is displayed, and at the position corresponding to the storage area 0, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the special figure 2 game information during the execution of the notification display (variable display or stop display) of the special symbol is displayed.

For example, various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area as special figure 1 game information, and a hold effect targeting the special figure 1 game information is executed. If so, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed at a position corresponding to the storage area 3 in the reserved symbol display area b1 according to the start of the reserved effect.
After that, the display position of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is changed to the storage area 3 in response to the shift of the storage area for storing the reserved effect target game information from the storage area 3 to the storage area 2. Is shifted from the position corresponding to the storage area 2 to the position corresponding to the storage area 2.
Further, the display position of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is set to the storage area 2 in response to the shift of the storage area for storing the reserved effect target game information from the storage area 2 to the storage area 1. The position corresponding to is shifted to the position corresponding to the storage area 1.
Further, the display position of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is set to the storage area 1 according to the shift of the storage area for storing the reserved effect target game information from the storage area 1 to the storage area 0. The position corresponding to is shifted to the position corresponding to the storage area 0.
Then, in response to the end of the stop display of the special symbol based on the reserved effect target game information, the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information in the reserved symbol display area b1 (position corresponding to the storage area 0) ends. Will be done. This ends the hold effect.

In the present embodiment, as the types of the hold effect, a normal hold effect and a hold notice effect are defined.
The “normal hold effect” is a type of hold effect that does not suggest the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the game information subject to the hold effect.
In the present embodiment, as the type (aspect) of the reserved symbol h, a normal hold and a special hold are defined.
In the normal hold effect, the normal hold is displayed as the hold symbol h corresponding to the game information subject to the hold effect.
In the normal hold effect, the game information subject to the hold effect (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is stored in the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area). It starts according to the above, and ends according to the end of the stop display of the special symbol based on the reserved effect target game information.

(Hold notice production)
"Hold notice production" is a kind of look-ahead notice production. That is, the hold notice effect is a type of hold effect that suggests the result of the preliminary determination (step S9-8) based on the predetermined game information by the mode (display mode) of the hold symbol h corresponding to the game information. There is.
In the following description, the game information that is the target of the hold notice effect is referred to as "notice target game information". Further, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the advance notice target game information is referred to as "notice target reserved symbol hy".
The hold notice effect is an effect that suggests the result of the advance special symbol determination based on the game information subject to the advance (specifically, the possibility of being a "big hit symbol").
It should be noted that the hold notice effect may be configured to suggest the result of the advance special figure change pattern determination (specifically, the possibility of "super reach change") based on the game information subject to the notice.
In the hold notice effect, a special hold is displayed as the hold symbol hy to be noticed.
In the present embodiment, "blue hold", "green hold", "purple hold", and "red hold" are defined as modes (types) of special hold.
Then, in the hold notice effect, the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy changes, and the result of the preliminary determination based on the notice target game information (specifically, the big hit) depending on the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy that is finally displayed. The possibility that a gaming state will occur) is suggested.
Here, the expectations of each aspect of the special hold are "red hold", "purple hold", "green hold", and "blue hold" in order from the one with the highest jackpot expectation (high jackpot expectation → jackpot expectation). It is stipulated to be low).

When the hold notice effect is executed, one or a plurality of hold change triggers and the hold change contents corresponding to each hold change trigger are set. Then, in the hold notice effect, the mode of the hold symbol hy to be announced changes according to the hold change content corresponding to the hold change trigger each time.
The “holding change trigger” is a trigger for changing the mode of the reserved symbol hy to be notified. In addition, the "pending change content" is a content in which the mode of the reserved symbol hy subject to advance notice is changed.
In the present embodiment, the start time of the variable effect corresponding to each advance hold information, the start time of the variable effect corresponding to the advance notice target game information, and the like are defined as the hold change triggers. Then, when the hold notice effect is executed, one or a plurality of hold change triggers are set from among these hold change triggers.
In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is executed only for the special figure 2 game information among the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information.

(Variation production)
Next, each aspect of the variation effect executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
As described above, on the display screen 31a, the effect symbol display area A in which the effect symbols z1 and z2 corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed, and the effect symbols z1 and z2 corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed. It is possible to configure the symbol display area B.
Further, in each of the effect symbol display areas A and B, three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 on which the first effect symbol z1 is displayed and one second effect symbol display on which the second effect symbol z2 is displayed are displayed. It is configured to include the region a4.
In the following description, in each of the effect symbol display areas A and B, the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a1 is referred to as a “left symbol”, and the first effect symbol is displayed in the first effect symbol display area a2. 1 The effect symbol z1 is referred to as a “middle symbol”, and the first effect symbol z1 displayed in the first effect symbol display area a3 is referred to as a “right symbol”.
In the second effect symbol display area a4 of each effect symbol display area A, B, the second effect symbol z2 is constantly variably displayed during the execution of the variation effect (first half variation effect and second half variation effect).

First, each aspect of the first half variation effect will be described.
In the present embodiment, as the variation mode number (type of variation mode), the variation mode number corresponding to "pseudo-reamless variation", the variation mode number corresponding to "pseudo-ream 2 variation", and "pseudo-ream 3 variation". The variable mode number corresponding to is specified.
Further, as the mode (variation effect number) of the first half variation effect, "pseudo-reamless variation effect", "pseudo-ream 2 variation effect", and "pseudo-ream 3 variation effect" are defined.
Then, when the variation mode number corresponding to the "pseudo-reamless variation" is specified by the variation mode designation command, the "pseudo-reamless variation effect" is selected as the mode of the first half variation effect. On the other hand, when the variation mode number corresponding to the "pseudo-ream 2 variation" is specified by the variation mode designation command, the "pseudo-ream 2 variation effect" is selected as the mode of the first half variation effect.
On the other hand, when the variation mode number corresponding to the "pseudo-ream 3 variation" is specified by the variation mode designation command, the "pseudo-ream 3 variation effect" is selected as the mode of the first half variation effect.

The "pseudo-continuous variable effect" is usually configured to include a variable effect.
The "normal variation effect" refers to a display effect in which the first effect symbol z1 is normally variablely displayed in the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. Specifically, in the normal variation effect, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are displayed in a normal variation.
The “normal variation display” refers to a display in which the types of the first effect symbol z1 displayed at the lottery result display positions of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3 are sequentially replaced.
The "lottery result display position" means a position where the first effect symbol z1 is stopped and displayed in the stop effect described later.
In the "pseudo-continuous variation effect", the "normal variation effect" is started according to the start. Then, in the "pseudo-continuous variation effect", the normal variation display ("normal variation effect") of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is continued until the end of the "pseudo-continuous variation effect".
In the "pseudo-continuous variation effect", the pseudo-variation effect described later is not executed.
In the "pseudo-continuous variation effect"("pseudo-ream 2 variation effect" and "pseudo-ream 3 variation effect"), the variation display of the first effect symbol z1 is pseudo during the execution of one special symbol variation display. In addition, it is a production that is executed multiple times. Specifically, the pseudo-continuous variation effect is configured to include a plurality of pseudo-variation effects.
The "pseudo-ream 2 variation effect" is configured to include two pseudo variation effects. The "pseudo-ream 3-variation effect" is configured to include three pseudo-variation effects.
In the following description, among the pseudo-variation effects included in the pseudo-continuous variation effect, the final pseudo-variation effect is referred to as the "final-time pseudo-variation effect". Further, among the pseudo-variation effects included in the pseudo-continuous variation effects, each time of the pseudo-variation effects excluding the final inning pseudo-variation effect is referred to as "intermediate inning pseudo-variation effect".

Each of the pseudo-variation effects (intermediate-time pseudo-variation effect and final-time pseudo-variation effect) is composed of a normal variation effect, a normal reach variation effect, and a pseudo-continuous effect.
In the "normal reach variation effect", the first effect symbol z1 is temporarily stopped and displayed in two or more areas of the three first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3, and is temporarily stopped and displayed in two or more areas. This refers to a display effect in which the combination of the first effect symbol z1 is a combination included in the "big hit symbol".
In the following description, in the normal reach variation effect (or the reduced reach variation effect described later), the first effect symbol z1 temporarily stopped and displayed in the combination included in the "big hit symbol" is referred to as "the first effect forming the reach state". It is called "directed design z1".
Specifically, in the normal reach variation effect, the reach state is formed by the left symbol and the right symbol. That is, in the normal reach variation effect, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and the left symbol and the right symbol that are temporarily stopped are of the same type. In the normal reach fluctuation effect, the normal fluctuation display is continued for the middle symbol.
The "temporary stop display" is a state in which one type of first effect symbol z1 is moved (swinged, rotated, etc.) in a predetermined mode in the lottery result display positions of the first effect symbol display areas a1 to a3. , A display that stays continuously for a predetermined time.

The "pseudo-continuous production" is a production that encourages whether or not the next pseudo-variation production is executed.
The "pseudo-continuous effect" is a type of pseudo-continuous effect that incites (suggests) whether or not the next pseudo-variable effect is executed depending on whether or not the pseudo-continuous continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.
The "pseudo-ream continuation symbol" is configured to include information (in the present embodiment, the character "NEXT") that encourages the execution of the next pseudo-variation effect.
In the present embodiment, "pseudo-ream continuous production" and "pseudo-ream end production" are defined as "pseudo-ream production".
The "pseudo-continuous continuous effect" is an effect that suggests that the next pseudo-variation effect will be executed after inciting whether or not the next pseudo-variation effect will be executed.
Specifically, in the "pseudo-ream continuation effect", a pseudo-ream continuation symbol (middle symbol) appears as a middle symbol, and the pseudo-ream continuation symbol moves toward the lottery result display position. At this time, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the pseudo-continuous continuous symbol is slower than the moving speed of the first effect symbol z1 in the normal variation display. Then, in the "pseudo-ream continuation effect", the pseudo-ream continuation symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. This suggests that the next pseudo-variation effect will be executed.
The "pseudo-continuous end effect" is an effect that suggests that the next pseudo-variation effect will not be executed after inciting whether or not the next pseudo-variation effect will be executed.
Specifically, in the "pseudo-ream end effect", as in the pseudo-ream continuation effect, a pseudo-ream continuation symbol (middle symbol) appears as a middle symbol, and the pseudo-ream continuation symbol moves toward the lottery result display position. Moving. At this time, the moving speed of the pseudo-continuous continuous symbol is slower than the moving speed of the first effect symbol z1 in the normal variation display. Then, in the "pseudo-ream end effect", the pseudo-ream continuation symbol passes through the lottery result display position without being temporarily stopped. This suggests that the next pseudo-variation effect will not be executed.

In the midway pseudo variation effect of each time, the reach variation effect is executed after the normal variation effect is executed according to the start of the pseudo variation effect. That is, after the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are normally displayed in a variable manner, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the reach state is formed by the right symbol and the left symbol. Then, while the reach variation effect is being executed (during the formation of the reach state), the pseudo-continuous continuous effect is executed.
The pseudo-variable effect in the middle of each time is ended in response to the end of the pseudo-continuous continuous effect. Then, the next pseudo-variation effect is started according to the end of the halfway pseudo-variation effect.
In the final pseudo-variation effect of each time, the reach variation effect is executed after the normal variation effect is executed according to the start of the pseudo variation effect. That is, after the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are normally displayed in a variable manner, the left symbol and the right symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the reach state is formed by the right symbol and the left symbol. Then, while the reach variation effect is being executed (during the formation of the reach state), the pseudo continuous end effect is executed.
The final inning pseudo-variation effect of each inning is ended according to the end of the pseudo-continuous end effect. Then, the latter half variation effect (normal reach variation effect or super reach variation effect) is started according to the end of the final pseudo variation effect.

Next, each aspect of the latter half variation effect will be described.
In the present embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern), the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "variation without reach", the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "normal reach fluctuation", and the fluctuation corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" The pattern number and is specified.
Further, as the mode (variation effect number) of the latter half variation effect, "variation effect without reach", "normal reach variation effect", and "super reach variation effect" are defined.
Then, when the variation pattern number corresponding to the “variation without reach” is specified by the variation pattern designation command, the “variation effect without reach” is selected as the mode of the latter half variation effect. On the other hand, when the variation pattern number corresponding to the "normal reach variation" is specified by the variation pattern specification command, the "normal reach variation effect" is selected as the mode of the latter half variation effect. On the other hand, when the variation pattern number corresponding to "super reach variation" is specified by the variation pattern specification command, "super reach variation effect" is selected as the mode of the latter half variation effect.

The "variable effect without reach" is configured to include a normal variable effect as a display effect.
Specifically, in the "variable effect without reach", the "normal variable effect" is executed according to the start thereof. That is, the normal variation display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is started.
In the "variable effect without reach", the normal variation display ("normal variation effect") of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol is continued until the end of the "variable effect without reach". Then, the stop effect is started according to the end of the "variable effect without reach".
In the non-reach variable effect, the reach variable effect and the advanced reach effect, which will be described later, are not executed.
The "normal reach variation effect" is configured to include a normal reach variation effect.
Specifically, in the "normal reach variation effect", the normal reach variation effect is executed according to the start of the "normal reach variation effect". That is, the left symbol and the right symbol form a reach state. Normally, the reach variation effect ends when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start.
The "normal reach variation effect" ends in response to the end of the normal reach variation effect. Then, the stop effect is started according to the end of the "normal reach variation effect".
In the normal reach variation effect, the development reach effect described later is not executed.

The "super reach variation effect" is composed of a normal reach variation effect, a reduced reach variation effect, and a development reach effect as display effects.
The “reduced reach variation effect” refers to a display effect in which the first effect symbol z1 forming the reach state is reduced and displayed (temporarily stopped display). In particular, in the reduced reach variation effect, only the first effect symbol z1 that forms the reach state is displayed, and the display of the first effect symbol z1 that does not form the reach state is omitted. Specifically, in the reduced reach variation display, the right symbol and the left symbol forming the reach state are temporarily stopped and displayed in the reduced state, and the middle symbol is not displayed.
The "development reach effect" is an effect that encourages the "big hit symbol" to be stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4. The development reach effect is performed during the reach variable effect.

In the "super reach variation effect", the reduced reach variation effect is executed after the normal reach variation effect is executed according to the start.
That is, from the state in which the left and right symbols form the reach state, the left and right symbols forming the reach state are reduced, and the reduced left symbol is moved to the upper left end of the display screen 31a and reduced. The right symbol is moved to the upper right end of the display screen 31a, and the display of the middle symbol disappears. At this time, the reach state is formed by the left symbol and the right symbol that are stopped and displayed in the stop effect related to the predetermined stop effect number.
Then, in the "super reach variation effect", the "development reach effect" is executed during the period during which the reduced reach variation effect is being executed.
That is, the "development reach effect" is started when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the reduced reach variation effect. The "development reach production" ends when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start.
The "super reach variable production" is terminated at the end of the "development reach production". Then, when the "super reach variation effect" ends, the stop effect is started.

(Main notice production)
In the pachinko machine 1, the main notice effect is executed during the execution of the variable effect.
The "main notice effect" is an effect executed during the variation effect, and is an effect that suggests the result of the start determination (special figure hit determination, special symbol symbol determination, special figure variation pattern determination, etc.) related to the variation effect. It has become.
In the present embodiment, the main notice effect suggests the result of the special symbol determination (specifically, the possibility of being a "big hit symbol").
In the present embodiment, as the types of the main notice effect, a plurality of types having different effect contents are defined.

(Winning production)
In the pachinko machine 1, the winning effect is executed during the occurrence of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.
The "winning effect" is an effect executed during the occurrence of a big hit game state or a small hit game state, and is a winning type ("big hit 1" to "big hit 6" or "small hit 1" to "small hit 3". ) Is suggested.
In the present embodiment, winning effects corresponding to each winning type (each of "big hit 1" to "big hit 6" and "small hit 1" to "small hit 3") are defined.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, when "big hit 1" or "big hit 2" is won, a judge effect is executed as a winning effect (specifically, an effect during the ending time).
The "judgment effect" is an effect that suggests (notifies) a game state (special figure low probability state ("game state D") or special figure high probability state ("game state B") that occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. It has become.
As described above, when the "big hit 1" or the "big hit 2" is won, the stop symbols that are stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display area A are the same as each other (specifically, the "hidden symbol"). .. In addition, the number of round games executed when "big hit 1" or "big hit 2" is won is the same as each other (specifically, 4 [times]).
As a result, when the player wins the "big hit 1" or the "big hit 2", the player cannot discriminate between the two based on the mode of the stop symbol, the number of round games, and the like.
Therefore, when the "big hit 1" or the "big hit 2" is won, the judge effect is executed as the winning effect (specifically, the effect during the ending time).
Then, when the "big hit 1" is won, it is suggested (notification) that the gaming state generated after the end of the big hit gaming state is the special figure low probability state ("game state D") in the judge production. Will be done.
On the other hand, when the "big hit 2" is won, it is suggested (notification) that the gaming state generated after the end of the big hit gaming state is the special figure high probability state ("game state B") in the judge production. Will be done.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "big hit 6" is won, the game state (additional bonus) per the first normal figure is generated after the end of the big hit game state. At this time, a series of winning effects are executed during the period from the start of the big hit game state to the end of the first normal figure per game state (additional bonus) via the specific fluctuation.
As a result, from the start of the big hit game state related to "big hit 6" to the end of the first normal figure hit game state (additional bonus) can be produced as a series of game states (game sections), which is a hobby of the game. Can be improved.
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, during the occurrence of the special figure 2 game information (excluding the start determination related to the specific fluctuation) executed during the occurrence of the "game state B" and the occurrence of the "game state C". In the start determination based on the special figure 2 game information to be executed, the same variation mode (specifically, "dedicated variation") is selected as the variation mode of the special symbol.
As a result, the variation display of the special symbol based on the start determination of each time executed during the occurrence of "game state B" (excluding the specific variation), and each time executed during the occurrence of "game state C" During the variation display of the special symbol based on the start determination, the variation effect of the same content can be executed.
Here, when the "big hit 2", the "big hit 4", or the "big hit 5" is won, the "gaming state B" is generated according to the end of the big hit gaming state. Then, during the period in which the "game state B" is generated (hereinafter referred to as the "first bonus post-period"), it becomes easy (possible) to generate the game state per the second normal figure, and the player has it. It is possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease of balls.
On the other hand, when the "big hit 6" is won, the "game state B" is generated according to the end of the big hit game state, and the first special symbol executed during the occurrence of the "game state B" The game state shifts from "game state B" to "game state C" according to the end of the stop display. Then, during the occurrence of the "game state C", the game state (additional bonus) per the first normal figure is generated. Further, during the period during which the "game state C" is generated, during the period after the end of the game state per first normal figure (hereinafter referred to as "second bonus post-period"), the small hit game It becomes easy to generate a state, and it becomes possible to improve the ball ejection rate based on the small hit game state.
Therefore, as described above, it is executed during the variation display (excluding the specific variation) of the special symbol based on each start determination executed during the occurrence of the "game state B" and during the occurrence of the "game state C". The first bonus post-period and the second post-bonus period are produced as the same game section by executing the variation effect of the same content during the variation display of the special symbol based on the start judgment of each time. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Processing executed on the effect control board 300)
Next, the processing executed by the CPU of the effect control board 300 will be described.
(CPU initialization process)
First, the CPU initialization process executed by the CPU of the effect control board 300 will be described.
A reset circuit (not shown) is provided on the effect control board 300. The reset circuit generates a reset signal when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.
The CPU of the effect control board 300 starts the CPU initialization process (not shown) in response to the generation of the reset signal by the reset circuit.
When the CPU initialization process is started, first, various registers, various timers (frame timers, phase timers, etc.), clock generation circuits, various RAMs, and the like are initialized. Next, the effect random number update process for updating various effect random numbers is executed. After that, the effect random number update process is repeatedly executed until various interrupt processes described later are executed.

(Command reception interrupt processing)
Next, the command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU of the effect control board 300 executes a command reception interrupt process (not shown) in response to receiving a control command from the main control board 200.
In the command reception interrupt process, the control command received from the main control board 200 is stored (stored) in the reception buffer area of the RAM of the effect control board 300.

(Subtimer interrupt processing)
Next, the sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the effect control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the subtimer interrupt processing.
The effect control board 300 is configured to include a clock generation circuit. The clock generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal at predetermined intervals.
The CPU of the effect control board 300 starts the sub-timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 52 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of clock pulses by the clock generation circuit. When the subtimer interrupt processing is started, first, the process proceeds to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, the register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-2. In the register save process, the register value is saved in the RAM save area.
In step S31-2, the timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-3. In the timer update process, various timers (frame timer, phase timer, reset timer, etc.) included in the effect control board 300 are updated.
In step S31-3, the command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, the control command stored in the receive buffer of the RAM of the effect control board 300 is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the received control command is executed. The command analysis process will be described later.

In step S31-4, the time schedule management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-5. In the time schedule management process, the progress of each production is managed.
Here, the ROM of the effect control board 300 corresponds to each effect (each aspect of the variable effect, each aspect of the stop effect, each aspect of the advance notice effect, each aspect of the look-ahead advance notice effect, each aspect of the hold effect, etc.). The effect control table is stored.
The "effect control table" is information that defines the progress of the effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, movable body effect, etc.).
A plurality of process data are registered in each effect control table in chronological order. Each process data contains one or more command information. Each command information is a process for designating the start of a predetermined effect (display effect, sound effect, lamp effect, or movable body effect). In particular, each command information includes information for designating the content of the effect to be started (display effect number, sound effect number, lamp effect number, or movable body effect number).

In the time schedule management process, the effect control table corresponding to each effect set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control board 300 and the effect management timer corresponding to the effect (the effect management timer for measuring the elapsed time of the effect). ) And the progress of the effect are managed.
Specifically, for each effect, among the process data registered in the effect control table, the process based on the process data corresponding to the value of the current effect management timer is executed. As a result, the command information included in the process data is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control board 300.
At this time, when the command information specifies the start of the display effect, the display effect request information that specifies the display effect number included in the command information is the display effect request information storage area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. It is saved in.
On the other hand, when the command information specifies the start of the sound effect, the sound effect request information that specifies the sound effect number included in the command information is stored in the sound effect request information storage area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. It will be saved.
On the other hand, when the command information specifies the start of the lamp effect, the lamp effect request information that specifies the lamp effect number included in the command information is stored in the lamp effect request information storage area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. It will be saved.
On the other hand, when the command information specifies the start of the character effect, the character effect request information that specifies the character effect number included in the command information is the character effect request of the RAM of the effect control board 300. It is saved in the information storage area.
As described above, the processes based on the respective process data are sequentially executed for all the process data registered in the effect control table set in the predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control board 300.

In step S31-5, the register reset processing is executed and the subtimer interrupt processing is terminated. In the register restoration process, the value of the register saved in step S31-1 is restored.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the command analysis process in step S31-3 will be described.
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, the process proceeds to step S32-1 as shown in FIG. 53.
In step S32-1, the set value command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2.
In the set value command reception process, it is determined whether or not a subcommand that specifies a set value has been received. Then, when it is determined that the subcommand for specifying the set value has been received, the set value specified by the subcommand is stored (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control board 300.

In step S32-2, the game state command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3.
In the game state command reception process, it is determined whether or not the game state specification command has been received. Then, when it is determined that the game state designation command has been received, various effect flags are set.
In step S32-3, the hold command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4. The hold command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-4, the look-ahead command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-5. The look-ahead command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-5, the variable command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6. The variable command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-6, the stop command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-7. The stop command reception process will be described later.
In step S32-7, the opening command reception process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4). The opening command reception process will be described later.

(Hold command reception processing)
Next, the hold command reception process in step S32-3 will be described.
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the hold command reception process.
When the hold command reception process is executed in step S32-3, the process proceeds to step S36-1 as shown in FIG. 54.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the hold number designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2 and the hold number designation command is executed. If it is determined that the command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In step S36-2, it is determined whether or not the hold number specification command specifies an increase in the hold number (the hold number has increased by "1"), and the hold number specification command specifies the increase in the hold number. If it is determined that there is (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-3, and the command for specifying the number of holds does not specify an increase in the number of holds (specifies that the number of holds has decreased by "1"). If it is determined (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, the hold number addition process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the hold number addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command specifies an increase in the hold number.
Then, when it is determined that the hold number specification command specifies an increase in the special figure 1 hold number, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly added. Special figure 1 Set to the hold count counter. In addition, a normal hold effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 1 game information is set.
For this purpose, the effect control table corresponding to the normal hold effect is read out, and the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. At this time, as the display area for displaying the reserved symbol h, of the five display positions included in the reserved symbol display area b1, the storage area (storage area 0 to 0) in which the newly acquired special figure 1 game information is stored. The display position corresponding to the storage area 4) is set. Here, the storage area (storage area 0 to storage area 4) in which the newly acquired special figure 1 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the special figure 1 hold number counter.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hold number specification command specifies an increase in the hold number of special figure 2, a value obtained by adding "1" to the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly added. Special figure 2 Set to the hold count counter. In addition, a normal hold effect corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special figure 2 game information is set.
For this purpose, the effect control table corresponding to the normal hold effect is read out, and the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved symbol h, of the five display positions included in the reserved symbol display area b2, a storage area (storage area 0 to 0) in which the newly acquired special figure 2 game information is stored. The display position corresponding to the storage area 4) is set. Here, the storage area (storage area 0 to storage area 4) in which the newly acquired special figure 2 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the special figure 2 hold number counter.

In step S36-4, the hold number subtraction process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the hold number subtraction process, first, it is determined whether or not the hold number designation command specifies the subtraction of the hold number in Special Figure 1.
Then, when it is determined that the hold number specification command specifies the subtraction of the special figure 1 hold number, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special figure 1 hold number counter is newly added. Special figure 1 Set to the hold count counter. In addition, the display position of each reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1 is shifted (moved).
Specifically, the hold effect corresponding to the hold symbol h displayed at the position corresponding to the storage area 0 in the hold symbol display area b1 is terminated. As a result, the display of the hold symbol h corresponding to the finished hold effect is finished.
When the reserved symbol h is displayed at a position corresponding to the storage area 1 in the reserved symbol display area b1, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the position corresponding to the storage area 1 to the storage area. Shift to the position corresponding to 0.
When the reserved symbol h is displayed at a position corresponding to the storage area 2 in the reserved symbol display area b1, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the position corresponding to the storage area 2 to the storage area. Shift to the position corresponding to 1.
Further, in the reserved symbol display area b1, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the position corresponding to the storage area 3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the position corresponding to the storage area 3 to the storage area. Shift to the position corresponding to 2.
When the reserved symbol h is displayed at a position corresponding to the storage area 4 in the reserved symbol display area b1, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the position corresponding to the storage area 4 to the storage area. Shift to the position corresponding to 3.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number specification command specifies the subtraction of the special figure 2 hold number, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special figure 2 hold number counter is newly added. Special figure 2 Set to the hold count counter. In addition, the display position of each reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b2 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the hold effect corresponding to the hold symbol h displayed at the position corresponding to the storage area 0 in the hold symbol display area b2 is terminated. As a result, the display of the hold symbol h corresponding to the finished hold effect is finished.
Further, in the reserved symbol display area b2, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the position corresponding to the storage area 1, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the position corresponding to the storage area 1 to the storage area. Shift to the position corresponding to 0.
Further, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the position corresponding to the storage area 2 in the reserved symbol display area b2, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the position corresponding to the storage area 2 to the storage area. Shift to the position corresponding to 1.
Further, in the reserved symbol display area b2, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the position corresponding to the storage area 3, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the position corresponding to the storage area 3 to the storage area. Shift to the position corresponding to 2.
Further, in the reserved symbol display area b2, when the reserved symbol h is displayed at the position corresponding to the storage area 4, the display position of the reserved symbol h is changed from the position corresponding to the storage area 4 to the storage area. Shift to the position corresponding to 3.

(Read-ahead command reception processing)
Next, the look-ahead command reception process in step S32-4 will be described.
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead command reception process.
When the look-ahead command reception process is executed in step S32-4, the process proceeds to step S33-1 as shown in FIG. 55.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead designation command (first look-ahead designation command, second look-ahead designation command, and third look-ahead designation command) has been received, and it is determined that the look-ahead designation command has been received (Yes). ), The process proceeds to step S33-2, and if it is determined that the look-ahead designation command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, the look-ahead information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the look-ahead information analysis process, the information specified by the look-ahead designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control board 300 as hold information.
The RAM of the effect control board 300 includes a special figure 1 hold information storage area for storing special figure 1 hold information and a special figure 2 hold information storage area for storing special figure 2 hold information. ing.
The special figure 1 reserved information storage area is configured to include a storage area 0 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the special figure 1 reserved information. Then, in the special figure 1 reserved information storage area, the special figure 1 reserved information corresponding to the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area is stored.
That is, the special figure 1 reserved information stored in the storage area 0 of the special figure 1 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 0 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. There is. The special figure 1 reserved information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. Further, the special figure 1 reserved information stored in the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 2 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. There is. Further, the special figure 1 reserved information stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. There is. Further, the special figure 1 reserved information stored in the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special figure 1 game information stored in the storage area 4 of the special figure 1 game information storage area. There is.

The special figure 2 reserved information storage area is configured to include a storage area 0 to a storage area 4 as a storage area capable of storing the special figure 2 reserved information. Then, in the special figure 2 reserved information storage area, the special figure 2 reserved information corresponding to the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area is stored.
That is, the special figure 2 reserved information stored in the storage area 0 of the special figure 2 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 0 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. There is. The special figure 2 hold information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. Further, the special figure 2 hold information stored in the storage area 2 of the special figure 2 hold information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 2 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. There is. Further, the special figure 2 reserved information stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 2 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 3 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. There is. Further, the special figure 2 reserved information stored in the storage area 4 of the special figure 2 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special figure 2 game information stored in the storage area 4 of the special figure 2 game information storage area. There is.
Each hold information (special figure 1 hold information or special figure 2 hold information) includes symbol information indicating the type of the stopped symbol and the first fluctuation information indicating the content of the fluctuation mode (“variation mode number” or “indefinite value”). And the second fluctuation information indicating the content of the fluctuation pattern (“variation pattern number” or “indefinite value”).

In the look-ahead information analysis process, first, it is determined whether or not the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
Then, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol designated by the first look-ahead designation command (“missing symbol”, “big hit symbol 1”). , "Big hit symbol 2" or "Small hit symbol 1" to "Small hit symbol 3"), the content of the variable mode specified by the second look-ahead designation command ("variable mode number" or "indefinite value"), The content of the fluctuation pattern specified by the third look-ahead specification command (“variation pattern number” or “indefinite value”) is analyzed, and the symbol information corresponding to the type of stopped symbol analyzed and the content of the analyzed variation mode are analyzed. The special figure 1 hold information including the first fluctuation information corresponding to the above and the second fluctuation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed fluctuation pattern is generated. Then, the generated special figure 1 hold information is stored (saved) in the special figure 1 hold information storage area.
At this time, the priority of each storage area of the special figure 1 reserved information storage area is set to the storage area 1, the storage area 2, the storage area 3, and the storage area 4 (upper → lower) in order from the highest priority. It is stipulated in. Then, the generated special figure 1 reserved information is stored in a vacant storage area (a storage area having the highest priority among the vacant storage areas) in the storage areas 1 to 4.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of stop symbol specified by the first look-ahead designation command (“missing symbol”, “big hit symbol 3”). "-" Big hit symbol 6 "or" Small hit symbol 1 "to" Small hit symbol 3 "), the content of the variable mode specified by the second look-ahead designation command ("variable mode number "or" indefinite value "), The content of the fluctuation pattern specified by the third look-ahead specification command (“variation pattern number” or “indefinite value”) is analyzed, and the symbol information corresponding to the type of stopped symbol analyzed and the content of the analyzed variation mode are analyzed. The special figure 2 hold information including the first fluctuation information corresponding to the above and the second fluctuation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed fluctuation pattern is generated. Then, the generated special figure 2 hold information is stored (saved) in the special figure 2 hold information storage area.
At this time, the priority of each storage area of the special figure 2 reserved information storage area is set to storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (upper → lower) in order from the highest priority. It is stipulated in. Then, the generated special figure 2 hold information is stored in a vacant storage area (a storage area having the highest priority among the vacant storage areas) in the storage areas 1 to 4.
In the following description, the hold information (special figure 1 hold information or special figure 2 hold information) stored in the hold information storage area in step S33-2 is referred to as “acquisition hold information”. Further, among the reserved information (special figure 2 reserved information or special figure 2 reserved information) stored in the reserved information storage area (special figure 1 reserved information storage area or special figure 2 reserved information storage area), from the acquisition pending information. The hold information on which the notification display (variation display and stop display) is executed first is referred to as "advance hold information".

Here, when the storage area of each game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is shifted in the game information storage area (special figure 1 game information storage area or special figure 2 game information storage area). Along with this, in the reserved information storage area (special figure 1 reserved information storage area or special figure 2 reserved information storage area), the reserved information (special figure 1 reserved information or special figure 2 reserved information) corresponding to the game information is The storage area is shifted.
In the present embodiment, the hold information storage area (special figure 1 hold information storage area or special figure 2 hold information storage area) is received in response to the reception of predetermined control commands (symbol type designation command, variation mode designation command, and variation pattern designation command). In the area), the storage area of each hold information (special figure 1 hold information or special figure 2 hold information) is shifted.
At this time, when a predetermined control command corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is received, the storage area in which the special figure 1 hold information is stored is shifted in the special figure 1 hold information storage area. .. That is, first, the stored contents of the storage area 1 are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 2 are shifted to the storage area 1. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 3 are shifted to the storage area 2. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 are shifted to the storage area 3. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, when a predetermined control command corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) is received, the storage area in which the special figure 2 hold information is stored is shifted in the special figure 2 hold information storage area. That is, first, the stored contents of the storage area 1 are shifted (moved) to the storage area 0. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 2 are shifted to the storage area 1. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 3 are shifted to the storage area 2. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 are shifted to the storage area 3. Next, the stored contents of the storage area 4 are cleared (initialized).

Further, in response to the reception of the demo designation command, the stored contents of the storage area 0 of the reserved information storage area (special figure 1 reserved information storage area or special figure 2 reserved information storage area) are cleared (initialized).
At this time, when a demo designation command for specifying that the customer waiting state has started for the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is received, the stored contents of the storage area 0 of the special figure 1 reserved information storage area are cleared. (Initialized).
On the other hand, when a demo designation command for specifying that the customer waiting state has started for the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) is received, the stored contents of the storage area 0 of the special figure 1 reserved information storage area are cleared ( (Initialized).

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is being executed, and if it is determined that the look-ahead notice effect is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-4 and the look-ahead notice effect is performed. If it is determined that the process is being executed (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In the present embodiment, “1” is set in the pre-reading advance notice effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control board 300 during execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect. Therefore, in step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is being executed based on whether or not "1" is set in the pre-reading advance notice effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. ..
In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5, and the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied (No), a series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In the present embodiment, (1) the acquisition hold information is the special figure 2 hold information, and (2) the advance hold of a predetermined number (“1” in the present embodiment) or more in the special figure 2 hold information storage area. Information is stored, (3) There is no advance hold information that specifies the "big hit symbol" in the special figure 2 hold information storage area, and (4) "normal reach fluctuation" in the special figure 2 hold information storage area. There is no advance hold information that specifies the variation pattern number corresponding to "super reach variation" (Special Figure 2 All advance hold information stored in the hold information storage area is the variation mode number / variation pattern number. All the conditions are that "indefinite value" is specified), (5) a special figure high probability state is occurring, and (6) a big hit game state or a small hit game state is not occurring. If the condition is satisfied, it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied.
The content of the pre-reading notice effect execution condition can be changed as appropriate. That is, as a configuration in which it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect execution condition is satisfied when one or more of the above (1) to (6) is satisfied instead of all the conditions (1) to (6) above. It doesn't matter. Further, the pre-reading notice effect execution condition may include other conditions different from the above conditions (1) to (6).

In step S33-5, the look-ahead notice effect lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-6. In the look-ahead notice effect lottery process, a look-ahead notice effect lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect.
In the ROM of the effect control board 300, a pre-reading notice effect lottery table in which the winning value of the pre-reading advance notice effect lottery is registered is stored.
In the look-ahead notice effect lottery process, first, a look-ahead notice effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. Then, based on the acquired look-ahead notice effect lottery random number and the look-ahead notice effect lottery table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading notice effect lottery executed in step S33-5 has been won, and if it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect lottery has been won (Yes), step S33-7 is performed. If it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect lottery has been lost (No), the series of processes is completed and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
Here, when it is determined that the pre-reading notice effect lottery has been won, it is determined to execute the pre-reading notice effect (hold notice effect) for the acquisition pending information.
In the following description, the acquisition hold information (special figure 2 hold information) that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is referred to as “notice target hold information”. Further, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the advance notice target pending information (notice target game information) is referred to as "notice target reserved symbol hy".
Further, the special figure 2 game information (special figure 2 game information corresponding to the notice target hold information) that is the target of the pre-reading notice effect is referred to as "notice target game information". Further, among the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area, the special figure 2 game information in which the start determination is executed before the advance notice target game information is referred to as "preceding game information".

In step 33-7, the look-ahead advance notice effect setting process is executed, a series of processes are completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). In the look-ahead notice effect setting process, the content of the look-ahead notice effect (hold notice effect) is set.
Specifically, in the look-ahead notice effect setting process, first, the hold final mode selection process is executed. In the hold final mode selection process, the hold final mode is selected and set.
The "holding final mode" is a mode of the notice target hold symbol hy that finally changes in the hold notice effect.
The ROM of the effect control board 300 stores a hold final mode lottery table in which correspondence between the hold final mode lottery random number and the hold final mode is registered.
Further, as the hold final mode lottery table, the hold final mode lottery table corresponding to each type of stop symbol (“missing symbol”, “small hit symbol” or “big hit symbol”) is stored.
In the hold final mode selection process, first, the hold final mode lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the type of the stop symbol specified by the acquisition hold information is confirmed, and the hold final mode lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, the hold final mode is selected (determined) based on the acquired hold final mode lottery random number and the read hold final mode lottery table.

In the look-ahead notice effect setting process, the scenario selection process is then executed. In the scenario selection process, a scenario (data) for the hold notice effect is selected and set.
The scenario of the hold notice effect is composed of information for designating one or more hold change triggers and information for designating the hold change pattern corresponding to each hold change trigger.
The “holding change trigger” is a trigger for changing the mode of the reserved symbol hy to be notified.
The “hold change pattern” is a content in which the mode of the hold symbol hy to be notified changes.
The ROM of the effect control board 300 stores a scenario lottery table in which correspondence between the scenario lottery random number and the scenario of the hold notice effect is registered.
Further, as the scenario lottery table, the scenario lottery table corresponding to each combination of the final mode of holding and the number of holdings of special figure 2 is stored.
Then, in the scenario lottery table corresponding to each hold final mode, a scenario in which the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy that finally changes becomes the hold final mode is registered.
Here, in each scenario, as a hold change pattern corresponding to each hold change trigger, the mode of the notice target hold symbol hy after the change has a jackpot expectation degree as compared with the mode of the notice target hold hy before the change. The content that is a high aspect is specified. As a result, during the execution of the hold notice effect, the mode of the reservation target symbol hy changes to a mode in which the expectation of a big hit is higher.
In the scenario selection process, first, a scenario lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the final mode of hold selected in the final mode of hold selection process and the number of hold of special figure 2 are confirmed, and the scenario lottery table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. Then, the scenario of the hold notice effect is determined (determined) based on the acquired scenario lottery random number and the read scenario lottery table.
In the pre-reading notice effect setting process, next, "1" is set in the pre-reading notice effect during flag area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. Further, the scenario of the hold notice effect determined in the scenario selection process is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. As a result, the hold notice effect is executed according to the set scenario.
By a process (not shown), "0" is set in the pre-reading advance notice effect flag area of the RAM of the effect control board 300 according to the end of the hold advance notice effect (the end of the notification display based on the advance notice target game information).

(Variable command reception processing)
Next, the variable command reception process in step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the variable command reception process.
When the variable command reception process is executed in step S32-5, the process proceeds to step S34-1 as shown in FIG. 56.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not a predetermined control command has been received, and if it is determined that a predetermined control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2 and the predetermined control command is executed. If it is determined that the command has not been received (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control command refers to a symbol type specification command, a variation mode specification command, and a variation pattern specification command.
In step S34-2, the stop effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-3. In the stop effect determination process, the stop effect number (mode of the stop effect) is determined.
Specifically, in the stop effect determination process, the stop effect number (mode of the stop effect) is determined based on the type of the stop symbol specified by the symbol type designation command. Then, the determined stop effect number is stored in the stop effect number storage area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. At this time, when the symbol type designation command corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is received, the determined stop effect number is changed to the stop effect number corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information). Save to storage area. On the other hand, when the symbol type designation command corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) is received, the determined stop effect number is stored in the stop effect number corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information). Save to area.

In step S34-3, the variation effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-4. In the variation effect determination process, the variation effect number (mode of the variation effect) is determined.
Specifically, in the variation effect determination process, first, the first half variation effect determination process for determining the first half variation effect number (mode of the first half variation effect) is executed.
The ROM of the effect control board 300 stores a first half variation effect lottery table in which correspondence between the variation mode number (type of variation mode) and the first half variation effect number (mode of the first half variation effect) is registered.
In the first half variation effect determination process, first, the first half variation effect lottery table is read. Then, among the first half variation effect numbers registered in the first half variation effect lottery table, the first half variation effect number corresponding to the variation mode number designated by the variation mode designation command is determined (selected).

In the variation effect determination process, next, the second half variation effect determination process for determining the second half variation effect number (mode of the second half variation effect) is executed.
The ROM of the effect control board 300 stores a second half variation effect lottery table in which correspondences between the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) and the second half variation effect number (mode of the second half variation effect) are registered.
In the second half variation effect determination process, first, the second half variation effect lottery table is read. Then, among the latter half variable effect numbers registered in the latter half variable effect lottery table, the latter half variable effect number corresponding to the variable pattern number designated by the variable pattern designation command is determined (selected).

In step S34-4, the advance notice effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-5. In the advance notice effect determination process, the main advance notice effect number (mode of the main advance notice effect) is selected.
In the ROM of the effect control board 300, a notice effect lottery table in which the correspondence between the notice effect lottery random number and the main notice effect number (mode of the main notice effect) is registered is stored.
Further, as a notice effect lottery table, a notice effect lottery table corresponding to each stop symbol number (for each type of stop symbol) is stored.
In order to determine the mode of the main advance notice effect, first, the advance notice effect lottery random number is acquired from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the stop symbol number specified by the stop symbol designation command is confirmed, and the advance notice effect lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, the main notice effect number is determined (determined) based on the acquired notice effect lottery random number and the read notice effect lottery table.

In step S34-5, the variation effect setting process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the variable effect setting process, the effect control table for the variable effect is set.
Specifically, in the variation effect setting process, the effect control table corresponding to the first half variation effect number determined in step S34-3 and the effect control table corresponding to the second half variation effect number determined in step S34-3 are provided. read out.
Next, the read effect control table is combined to generate an effect control table related to the variation effect. Then, the generated effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area of the RAM of the effect control board 300.
At this time, when the symbol type designation command corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is received, the generated effect control table is displayed as the effect control table corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information). Set in the setting area. As a result, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbols z1 and z2) is started in the effect symbol display area A.
On the other hand, when the symbol type designation command corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) is received, the generated effect control table is set to the effect control table corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information). Set in the area. As a result, the variable effect (variable display of the effect symbols z1 and z2) is started in the effect symbol display area B.
Further, the effect control table corresponding to the main notice effect number determined in step S34-4 is read out. Then, the read effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. As a result, the main advance notice effect is started at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable effect.

(Stop command reception processing)
Next, the stop command reception process in step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the stop command reception process.
When the stop command reception process is executed in step S32-6, the process proceeds to step S35-1 as shown in FIG. 57.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not the stop designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the stop designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2 and the stop designation command is received. If it is determined that there is no such process (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, the stop effect setting process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7). In the stop effect setting process, the effect control table of the stop effect is set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, when a stop designation command corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is received, the stop effect number corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information) is stored. The stop effect number saved in the area is acquired, and the effect control table corresponding to the acquired stop effect number is read out. Then, the read effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1 game information). As a result, the stop effect (stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2) is started in the effect symbol display area A.
On the other hand, in the stop effect setting process, when the stop designation command corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) is received, the stop effect number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information) is stored. The saved stop effect number is acquired, and the effect control table corresponding to the acquired stop effect number is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area corresponding to the second special symbol (special figure 2 game information). As a result, the stop effect (stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2) is started in the effect symbol display area B.

(Opening command reception processing)
Next, the opening command reception process of step S32-7 will be described.
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the opening command reception process.
When the opening command reception process is executed in step S32-7, the process proceeds to step S39-1 as shown in FIG. 58.
In step S39-1, it is determined whether or not the opening designation command has been received, and if it is determined that the opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-2 and the opening designation command is received. If it is determined that there is no such process (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4).
In step S39-2, the winning effect setting process is executed, the series of processes is completed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4). In the winning effect setting process, the effect control table of the winning effect is set.
Specifically, in the winning effect setting process, the effect control table corresponding to the type of stop symbol specified by the opening designation command is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. As a result, the winning production is started.

(Action of pachinko machine 1)
In the pachinko machine 1, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 1 has won the game (“winning the game”), the game state per game occurs after the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. In addition, it is possible to execute a time saving control (causing a high probability state of the normal map) in which the frequency of winning is improved by the winning decision of the normal map. Then, as a mode (variation time) of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, a mode (second fluctuation time) corresponding to the execution of the time reduction control (during the occurrence of the high probability state of the normal figure) is set, and the game state per normal symbol is set. As an aspect (opening / closing pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 71b), it is possible to set an aspect (first opening / closing pattern) corresponding to the stoppage of the time saving control (during the occurrence of the low probability state in the normal figure).
That is, as a mode of displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol based on the determination of winning the normal figure, a mode (second fluctuation time) corresponding to the execution of the time saving control (during the occurrence of the high probability state of the normal figure) is set. As a mode of the game state per game based on the judgment of winning the game, a mode (first opening / closing pattern) corresponding to the time saving control being stopped (during the occurrence of the low probability state of the game) is set.
As a result, the mode of the variable display of the normal symbol and the mode of the game state per normal figure based on the one normal figure winning determination can be set to correspond to different game states (normal figure probability states) of the game. It is possible to improve the interest.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, in the game state per game started while the time reduction control is stopped, the ball enters the electric ball entry device 71 as compared with the game state per game started during the execution of the time reduction control. It becomes easy for the pachinko ball to pass through each of the operating gates g1 and g2. In particular, the ratio (base ratio) of the number of prize balls to be paid out to the number of game balls to be fired is 100 [%] or more in the game state per game that is started while the time reduction control is stopped.
As a result, it is possible to increase the number of balls held by the player based on the entry of the game ball into the non-electric ball entry devices 72 and 73 while the time reduction control is stopped, and the interest of the game can be further improved. It will be possible.

(Modification example 1)
Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various modifications can be made in the above embodiment.
For example, in the above embodiment, when the "big hit 6" is won in order to generate the game state per the first normal figure after the end of the "big hit 6", at the end of the stop display (stop time) of the special symbol. , The configuration is such that the high probability state (time reduction control) is terminated.
However, when the "big hit 6" is won, the "big hit 6" is configured so that the high probability state (time reduction control) of the normal figure is terminated when the start determination is executed (at the start of the variable display of the special symbol). After the end of, the game state can be generated per the first normal figure. At this time, for example, when the "big hit 6" is won, the time saving number of times is set to 2 [times], so that the game state per the first normal figure is generated after the end of the "big hit 6". Can be made to.

(Modification 2)
Further, in the above embodiment, in the main control board 200, from any of the electric ball entry switch 105, the first non-electric ball entry switch 111, and the second non-electric ball entry switch 112. The configuration may be such that the special figure game information (special figure 1 game information or special figure 2 game information) is acquired by the input of the detection signal.

(Modification 3)
Further, in the above embodiment, when the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the big hit game state, the special high probability state is generated according to the end of the big hit game state. It has become.
However, when the "high-probability jackpot symbol" is determined by the special symbol symbol determination, the special symbol high-probability state may be generated according to the end of the jackpot game state.

(Modification example 4)
Further, in the above embodiment, for one of the game information of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information, at the start of the stop display (stop time) of the "big hit symbol" or the "small hit symbol", the other When the game information is being displayed in a variable manner (during the variable time), the other game information is forcibly changed to the "off symbol", and the variable display (variable time) is terminated and stopped. The display (stop time) is started.
However, at the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state based on one of the special figure 1 game information and the special figure 2 game information, the other game information is being displayed in a variable manner (during the variable time). In this case, the other game information may be forcibly changed to the "off symbol", the fluctuation display (variation time) is terminated, and the stop display (stop time) is started. ..

(Modification 5)
Further, in the above embodiment, the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the first special symbol on the special figure 1 display device and the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the second special symbol on the special figure 2 display device. , Can be executed in parallel at the same time (at the same time).
However, the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the first special symbol on the special figure 1 display device and the notification display (variation display and stop display) of the second special symbol on the special figure 2 display device are simultaneously (same as above). It may be configured so that it is not executed in parallel with the time).
That is, the big hit game state or the small hit game state is not occurring, the notification display (variation display or stop display) of the first special symbol is not being executed, and the notification display (variation display) of the second special symbol is not being executed. Of the special figure 1 game information stored in the special figure 1 game information storage area and the special figure 2 game information stored in the special figure 2 game information storage area when the stop display) is not being executed. , One game information may be selected, and the start determination may be executed based on the selected game information.

(Modification 6)
Further, in the above embodiment, when the "big hit 6" is won, the time saving number of times is set to 1 [time] or 100 [time]. At this time, if the passage of the V region by the game ball during the occurrence of the jackpot game state is detected, 1 [times] is set as the number of time reductions, and the passage of the V region by the game ball during the occurrence of the jackpot gaming state is set. If it is not detected, 100 [times] is set as the number of time reductions.
However, when the "big hit 6" is won, 1 [times] is set as the number of time reductions regardless of whether or not the passage of the V region by the game ball is detected during the occurrence of the big hit gaming state. It doesn't matter.

1 Pachinko machine 51 1st start port 52 2nd start port 55 Grand prize opening 70 Accessory unit 71 Electric ball entry device 72 1st non-electric ball entry device 73 2nd non-electric ball entry device g1 1st operation gate g2 2nd Operating gate 200 Main control board 300 Production control board

Claims (2)

A game control means for executing a specific game after executing a variable game when it is determined that the player has won the prize.
It is provided with a specific state control means capable of causing a specific state in which the frequency of winning is determined by the winning / failing determination.
The game control means can set a mode corresponding to the occurrence of a specific state as a mode of a variable game, and a mode corresponding to the non-occurrence of a specific state as a mode of a specific game. A game machine featuring. An electric entry port that displaces the game ball so that it can be entered during the execution of a specific game,
An operating area that can be passed by a game ball that has entered the electric ball entrance
It is provided with a non-electric ball entry port that is displaced so that the game ball can enter the ball when the game ball passes through the operating region.
In the specific game started during the non-occurrence of the specific state, as compared with the specific game started during the occurrence of the specific state, it becomes easier for the game ball entering the electric entry port to pass through the operating region. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the ratio of the number of prize balls to be paid out to the number of game balls to be launched is 100% or more.

Images